0% found this document useful (0 votes)

30 views504 pages

Triple Physics

The document contains an equation booklet for the Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1) Physics and Combined Science papers. It lists essential physics equations related to forces, electricity, waves, energy, and other topics relevant for the assessment. Additionally, it includes instructions for candidates regarding examination procedures and requirements.

Uploaded by

acetylyt

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

30 views504 pages

Triple Physics

Uploaded by

acetylyt

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 504

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

May–June 2022 Assessment Window

Paper
reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P
Equation Booklet
Do not return this Booklet with the question paper.

Turn over

P70951A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

Q:1/1/1/1/1/
*P70951A*
These equations may be required for both International GCSE Physics (4PH1) and
International GCSE Combined Science (4SD0) papers.

1. Forces and Motion

distance moved
average speed =
time taken

acceleration = change in velocity a!

#v " u $
time taken t
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v2 ! u 2 " $ 2 # a # s %

force = mass × acceleration F=m×a

weight = mass × gravitational field strength W=m×g

2. Electricity

power = current × voltage P=I×V

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E=I×V×t

voltage = current × resistance V=I×R

charge = current × time Q=I×t

energy transferred = charge × voltage E=Q×V

3. Waves

wave speed = frequency × wavelength v=f×λ

1 1
frequency = f =
time period T

sin! angle of incidence " sin i

refractive index = n=
sin! angle of refraction" sin r

1 1
sin! critical angle " # sin c =
refractive index n

2 P70951A
4. Energy resources and energy transfers

useful energy output

efficiency = ×100%
total energy output

work done = force × distance moved W=F×d

gravitational potential energy = mass × gravitational field strength × height

GPE = m × g × h

1 1
kinetic energy = × mass × speed2 KE ! " m " v 2
2 2

work done W
power = P=
time taken t

5. Solids, liquids and gases

mass m
density = !"
volume V

force F
pressure = p=
area A
pressure difference = height × density × gravitational field strength
p=h× ×g

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

pressure × volume = constant p 1 × V1 = p 2 × V2

8. Astrophysics

2! " ! orbital radius 2"# " r

orbital speed = v!
time period T

The equations on the following page will only be required for International GCSE Physics.

P70951A 3

Turn over
These additional equations may be required in International GCSE Physics papers 2P
and 2PR.

1. Forces and Motion

momentum = mass × velocity p=m×v

force =
change in momentum
F!
# mv " mu $
time taken t

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

5. Solids, liquids and gases

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

6. Magnetism and electromagnetism

relationship between input and output voltages for a transformer

input (primary) voltage primary turns
=
output (secondary) voltage secondary turns

input power = output power Vp Ip = Vs Is

for 100% efficiency

8. Astrophysics

change in wavelength velocity of a galaxy ! " !0 $! v

= # #
reference wavelength speed of light !0 !0 c

END OF EQUATION LIST

4 P70951A
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Wednesday 22 May 2019

Afternoon (Time: 2 hours) Paper Reference 4PH1/1PR 4SD0/1PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
Paper: 1PR
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, protractor, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centre
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer allthequestions.
Answer
• – there may bequestions in the spaces provided
more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• your mind
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change
about an answer, put a line through the box and then mark
your new answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Checkanswer
Try to every question.
• your answers if you have time at the end.
Turn over

P60184A
©2019 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1/
*P60184A0136*
4 Photograph 1 shows an outdoor swimming pool.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Photograph 1

(a) The water in the swimming pool is heated by the Sun during the day.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(i) State how energy is transferred from the Sun to the water.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State what happens to the average speed of the water molecules as the water
is heated.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10
*P60184A01036*
(b) The water in the swimming pool cools down at night.
(i) Suggest why the water cools down at night.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

(ii) Photograph 2 shows the swimming pool with a plastic cover over the water.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Photograph 2

Explain why the plastic cover reduces how much the water cools down at night.
(4)

.............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 4 = 7 marks)

11
*P60184A01136* Turn over
5 A student is given a type of putty that conducts electricity.
He rolls the putty into cylinders of different cross-sectional area.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The photograph shows the cylinders.

The student investigates how the electrical resistance of the putty is affected by its
cross-sectional area.
(a) The diagram shows the cross-sectional area of one of the cylinders of putty.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

drawn to scale

(i) Use the diagram to determine the mean diameter of the cylinder of putty.
(2)

mean diameter = .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the cross-sectional area of the cylinder of putty in cm2.

[area of a circle = π × radius2]
(2)

cross-sectional area = ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm2

13
*P60184A01336* Turn over
(b) The student connects a cylinder of putty to a battery.
He measures the voltage of the cylinder and the current in the circuit.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Complete the circuit diagram, adding suitable instruments to measure the voltage
of the cylinder and the current in the circuit.

putty cylinder

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(3)
(c) The student uses his voltage and current measurements to calculate the
resistance of this cylinder.
He repeats this for other cylinders.
The table shows some of his results.

Cross-sectional
Voltage in V Current in A Resistance in Ω
area in cm2
4.5 4.56 0.049 91.2

6.2 4.56 0.059 77.3

9.1 4.56 0.068 67.1

13.9 4.56 0.085 53.6

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

18.1 4.56 0.094 48.5 DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

24.6 4.56 0.107

(i) Calculate the resistance of the cylinder when the cross-sectional area of the
cylinder is 24.6 cm2.
Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
(2)

resistance = ................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ω

14
*P60184A01436*
(ii) Plot a graph of resistance on the y-axis and cross-sectional area on the x-axis.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) Draw the curve of best fit.

(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15
*P60184A01536* Turn over
(d) The student extends his investigation by connecting two new identical cylinders
to a battery.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The diagram shows the circuit he uses.

putty cylinder

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
He measures the voltage of each cylinder and the total current in the circuit.
Discuss how his measurements of voltage and current compare with the measurements
when only one of these cylinders is used.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 5 = 17 marks)

16
*P60184A01636*
6 The photograph shows a small glass ball used to investigate density and pressure.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) The mass of the ball is 19 g.

The density of the ball is 2.3 g/cm3.
(i) State the formula linking density, mass and volume.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the volume of the ball.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

volume = ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3

(b) The ball is dropped into deep water and sinks to a depth of 560 cm.
(i) State the formula linking pressure difference, height, density and gravitational
field strength.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the increase in pressure at this depth.

[density of water = 1000 kg/m3]
(2)

increase in pressure = .................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pa

(Total for Question 6 = 6 marks)

17
*P60184A01736* Turn over
7 A student investigates how the surface material of a ramp affects the average speed
of a block sliding down the ramp.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) Design a suitable method for the student’s investigation.
Your answer should include
● the measuring equipment needed
● details of the independent, dependent and control variables
● how the average speed will be determined
You may include a diagram to help your answer.
(6)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

18
*P60184A01836*
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) Justify why the student should display their results as a bar chart.
(1)

(Total for Question 7 = 7 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

19
*P60184A01936* Turn over
8 The graph shows how the velocity of a parachute jumper changes with time.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

60 –
A B

40 –
Velocity
in m / s
20 –

0–
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Time in s

(a) At point A, the parachute jumper is falling at terminal velocity and has not yet

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
opened her parachute.
(i) Which statement is correct about the parachute jumper at point A?
(1)
A acceleration and air resistance are equal
B acceleration and velocity are equal
C weight and acceleration are equal
D weight and air resistance are equal

(ii) Which is the best estimate of the distance fallen by the parachute jumper
from the start until point A?
(1)
A 50 m
B 1300 m
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

C 2300 m DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

D 2700 m

20
*P60184A02036*
(b) The parachute jumper opens her parachute at point B.
Her velocity decreases until she reaches terminal velocity again at point C.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Explain this change in velocity.

(4)

.............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) After point C, the parachute jumper continues to fall at a constant velocity.
As she falls, energy is transferred from a gravitational store.
Which store is the energy transferred into?
(1)
A chemical store
B gravitational store
C kinetic store
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

D thermal store

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

21
*P60184A02136* Turn over
10 (a) Diagram 1 shows a van accelerating along a horizontal road.
The horizontal forces acting on the van are shown.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

force X

driving force = 2500 N

Diagram 1

(i) Force X opposes the motion of the van.

State the name of force X.
(1)

(ii) The resultant force acting on the van is 1500 N.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the magnitude of force X.

[assume X is the only horizontal force opposing the motion of the van]
(1)

force X = ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

27
*P60184A02736* Turn over
(b) Diagram 2 shows the resultant force acting on the van when it brakes.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

resultant
force = 14 kN

Diagram 2

(i) State the formula linking resultant force, mass and acceleration.
(1)

(ii) The mass of the van is 1900 kg.

Calculate the acceleration of the van when it brakes.
Give the unit.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
acceleration = ............................................... unit .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(iii) The van was travelling at an initial speed of 18 m/s before braking and coming to rest.
Calculate the distance travelled by the van while it is braking.
[assume that the acceleration remains constant]
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

distance travelled = ................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

28
*P60184A02836*
(iv) Describe two factors that would increase the braking distance.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

1. ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) When the van is fully loaded its mass increases to 2500 kg.
Calculate the time taken to bring the fully loaded van to rest when it is travelling
at an initial speed of 18 m/s.
[assume that the resultant force during braking remains at 14 kN]
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

time = .............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(Total for Question 10 = 15 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

29
*P60184A02936* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 14 June 2019

Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2P

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centre
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer allthequestions.
Answer
• – there may bequestions in the spaces provided
more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• mind about
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Try to answer every question.
• your answers if you have time at the end.
Check

Turn over

P58374A
©2019 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1/1/1/C2
*P58374A0120*
6 A dog sits on a water-filled bag to keep cool.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

water-filled bag

(a) The table shows some data about the dog and the water in the bag.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
mass of water in kg 8.7

power output of dog by heating in W 75

specific heat capacity of water in J/kg °C 4200

initial temperature of water in °C 16

The dog sits on the bag for 22 minutes.

(i) Calculate the energy transferred from the dog to the water by heating
in 22 minutes.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
(ii) State an assumption you have made when calculating the energy transferred.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
*P58374A01220*
(iii) Calculate the temperature of the water after 22 minutes.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

temperature = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(b) Discuss why conduction is the main way that thermal energy is transferred from
the dog to the water.
(3)

(Total for Question 6 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
*P58374A01320* Turn over
8 The diagram shows a bottle supported by a finger.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

force from finger = 2.1 N not to

scale
3.2 cm

28 cm
Z

floor

weight of bottle

(a) State the name of point Z.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) (i) State the formula linking moment, force and perpendicular distance from the pivot.
(1)

(ii) The bottle does not move.

Calculate the weight of the bottle.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

weight of bottle = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(Total for Question 8 = 6 marks)

15
*P58374A01520* Turn over
9 This is a question about a melting ice cube.
(a) The diagram shows an ice cube placed on the ground.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

ice cube

ground

(i) The mass of the ice cube is 3.7 g and its area of contact with the ground
is 2.6 × 10–4 m2.
Calculate the pressure the ice cube exerts on the ground.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
pressure = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pa

(ii) The ice cube melts and becomes a puddle with a larger cross-sectional area.
Explain how the pressure of the ice cube on the ground changes when it melts.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

16
*P58374A01620*
(b) Ice melts at a temperature of 0 °C.
On the axes, sketch how the temperature of the ice cube changes as it rises from
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

a temperature of –10 °C to a temperature of 20 °C.

(3)

Temperature
in °C

0
Time

–10
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(c) Explain the changes that occur when a solid melts.

Refer to particles in your answer.
(2)

(Total for Question 9 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

17
*P58374A01720*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 14 June 2019

Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centre
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer allthequestions.
Answer
• – there may bequestions in the spaces provided
more space than you need.
• Show all steps in any calculations and state the units.
• your mind
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box
about an answer, put a line through the box
. If you change
and then mark
your new answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Try toyour
Write answers neatly and in good English.
• Checkanswer every question.
• your answers if you have time at the end.
Turn over

P60185A
©2019 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/
*P60185A0128*
Answer ALL questions.

1 (a) The diagram shows a fossil fuel power station.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Five stages of electricity generation and transmission are shown.

steam

water

furnace and boiler condenser turbines generator transformer

(i) The power station burns a fossil fuel in the furnace.

Give an example of a fossil fuel.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)

(ii) Which stage of the power station transfers energy from a chemical store to a
thermal store?
(1)
A condenser
B furnace and boiler
C generator
D turbines

(iii) Which stage of the power station transfers energy electrically from a kinetic
energy store?
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)
A condenser
B furnace and boiler
C generator
D turbines

4
*P60185A0428*
(b) Electricity can also be generated by solar farms.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Source: © Zoonar GmbH/Alamy)

Energy is transferred from the Sun to the solar farm by radiation.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The solar farm uses photovoltaic cells to transfer this energy electrically.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of generating electricity using solar farms.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

5
*P60185A0528* Turn over
3 (a) A student charges a plastic rod by rubbing it with a cloth.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The rod becomes negatively charged.
(i) Which statement explains how the rod becomes negatively charged?
(1)
A the rod gains positively charged electrons

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
B the rod loses positively charged electrons
C the rod gains negatively charged electrons
D the rod loses negatively charged electrons

(ii) Describe how the student could demonstrate that the rod is charged.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10
*P60185A01028*
(b) The student has several other rods made from different kinds of plastic.
Some rods can be charged positively and some can be charged negatively.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Describe an experiment to show that different rods have different types of charge.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 3 = 6 marks)

11
*P60185A01128* Turn over
5 Stearic acid is a solid at room temperature and melts at a temperature of 69 °C.
A student investigates the specific heat capacity of solid stearic acid.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

He heats a sample of stearic acid from room temperature using an electrical heater
and measures its temperature using a data logger and temperature sensor.
The graph shows his results.

Temperature
in °C 40

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
20

0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Time in s

(a) The student starts heating the stearic acid at 130 seconds.
(i) Determine the time it takes to heat the stearic acid until it reaches its
melting point.
(1)

time = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . s

(ii) The stearic acid gains 39 kJ of energy during the time it is heated to its melting point.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the mean (average) power of the heater. DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Give a unit with your answer.
[assume no energy lost to surroundings]
(3)

mean power = ............................................... unit ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
*P60185A01428*
(b) The mass of stearic acid used in the investigation is 0.45 kg.
The stearic acid gains 39 kJ of energy when it is heated to its melting point.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the specific heat capacity of stearic acid.

You should use data from the graph in your calculation.
(4)

specific heat capacity = ............................................... J/kg °C

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 5 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15
*P60185A01528* Turn over
7 A game is played on a table with balls of different colours.
(a) The diagram shows the white ball moving across a flat surface.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

v = 5.2 m/s

white ball

(i) State the formula linking momentum, mass and velocity.

(1)

(ii) The white ball has a mass of 170 g.

Calculate the momentum of the white ball.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
momentum = ............................................... kg m/s

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P60185A02228*
(b) The white ball collides with a stationary black ball.

v = 5.2 m/s v v = 5.0 m/s

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

white ball black ball white ball black ball

before collision after collision

(i) The black ball has a mass of 160 g.

After the collision, the black ball moves away from the white ball with a velocity
of 5.0 m/s.
Calculate the velocity of the white ball after the collision.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

velocity of white ball = ............................................. . . m/s

(ii) During the collision, the white ball exerts a force of 80 N on the black ball.
The direction of this force is to the right.
State the magnitude and direction of the force the black ball exerts on the
white ball during the collision.
(2)

magnitude of force = ....................................... . . . . . . . . N

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

direction of force = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 9 marks)

23
*P60185A02328* Turn over
8 The photograph shows a device that can be used to ignite small pieces of combustible material.
The device consists of a cylinder containing trapped air and a piston.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

piston

cylinder
combustible
material

before pushing piston after pushing piston

A small piece of combustible material is placed at the bottom of the cylinder.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
When the piston is pushed quickly into the cylinder, the trapped air is compressed
and heats up.
This increase in temperature is enough to ignite the combustible material.
(a) The piston is quickly pushed down a distance of 145 mm.
The average force exerted on the piston is 4.2 N.
(i) State the formula linking work done, force and distance moved in the direction of the force.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the work done on the trapped air when the piston is quickly pushed down.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

work done = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . J

24
*P60185A02428*
(iii) State the maximum amount of energy that could be transferred to the
trapped air.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . J

(iv) Using ideas about molecules, explain why the trapped air heats up.
(2)

(b) Suggest why the trapped air does not reach a high enough temperature to ignite
the combustible material if the piston is slowly pushed into the cylinder.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

25
*P60185A02528*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Tuesday 12 January 2021

Morning (Time: 2 hours) Paper Reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4PH1/4SD0
Paper: 1P
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator, protractor

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
mind about an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P68386A
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/
*P68386A0132*
Answer ALL questions.
1 The passage describes the evolution of a star with a mass that is much larger than the
mass of the Sun.
Use words or phrases from the box to complete the passage.
Each word or phrase may be used once, more than once, or not at all.
(6)

chemical contract expand gravitational

kinetic main sequence neutron star nuclear

protostar supernova vibrate white dwarf

Hydrogen atoms in a nebula move towards each other due to the force of gravity.

As the atoms move towards each other, their .......................................................................................... energy

store increases, which increases the temperature. If the temperature becomes

high enough, nuclear fusion of hydrogen will start and the star enters the

..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stage of its evolution.

When hydrogen fusion stops in the core of the star, the core of the star will start to

..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This increases the temperature in a layer

surrounding the core. Hydrogen fusion restarts in a layer surrounding the core.

This causes the star to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................. and its surface temperature

decreases. The star is now a red super giant. Eventually nuclear fusion stops in the

core of the star and the star explodes as a .......................................................................................... .

The core of the star collapses to form either a .......................................................................................... or a

black hole.

(Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

3
*P68386A0332* Turn over
2 (a) A speed camera is positioned at the side of a road.

© Darryl Sleath/Shutterstock
The camera measures the speed of a vehicle on the road to determine whether
the vehicle is travelling too fast.
The camera takes two photographs of the vehicle 0.25 s apart.
The photographs are used to measure the distance travelled by the vehicle during
this time.
(i) State the formula linking average speed, distance moved and time taken.
(1)

(ii) In the time between the two photographs, the car travels a distance of 6.5 m.
Calculate the average speed of the car.
(2)

average speed = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(iii) The speed limit of the road is 80 kilometres per hour.
Determine whether the car is exceeding the speed limit.
(2)

4
*P68386A0432*
(b) The velocity-time graph shows how the velocity of a lorry changes with time.

20
Velocity
in m/s
10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Time in s

(i) Explain how the graph shows that the lorry has a constant acceleration.
(2)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State the formula linking acceleration, change in velocity and time taken.
(1)

(iii) Calculate the acceleration of the lorry.

(3)

acceleration = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

(Total for Question 2 = 11 marks)

5
*P68386A0532* Turn over
3 The photograph shows a mains-operated, decorative lamp, X.

bulb

Lamp X has seven identical bulbs that are connected in series.

(a) Give a disadvantage of connecting the bulbs in series.
(1)

(b) Suggest an advantage of connecting the bulbs in series.

(1)

(c) Each bulb has a working resistance of 390 Ω.

The voltage across each bulb is 33 V.
(i) State the formula linking voltage, current and resistance.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the current in each bulb.

(3)

current = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

6
*P68386A0632*
(iii) Calculate the energy transferred to lamp X when it is used for 2.5 hours.
(4)

energy transferred = ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(d) Another decorative lamp, Y, uses five of the same 390 Ω bulbs connected in series.
Both lamps are mains operated.
Explain how the brightness of a single bulb in lamp Y compares to the brightness
of a single bulb in lamp X.
(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 13 marks)

7
*P68386A0732* Turn over
4 The photograph shows a hair dryer plugged into the mains supply.
The hair dryer contains a fuse.

(b) The fuse is an electrical safety feature used in mains-operated domestic appliances.
State two other electrical safety features that can be used in mains-operated
domestic appliances.
(2)

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P68386A0832*
(c) The hair dryer has a current of 9.6 A.
The mains supply voltage is 230 V.
(i) State the formula linking power, current and voltage.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the power of the hair dryer.

Give the unit.
(3)

power = ............................................................ unit ....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) The hair dryer contains a coil of wire which is used to heat air passing through
the hair dryer.
Explain why the coil of wire heats up when there is a current in it.
(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
*P68386A0932* Turn over
(d) Explain how a fuse protects a domestic appliance.
(3)

(Total for Question 4 = 13 marks)

10
*P68386A01032*
6 When a rubber ball is dropped it hits the floor and bounces.
Design an investigation to determine how the temperature of the rubber ball affects
the maximum height the ball reaches after it bounces.
In your answer, refer to
 how to change the temperature of the ball
 the variables that need to be controlled
 how to obtain high-quality data
You may draw a labelled diagram to support your answer.
(6)

(Total for Question 6 = 6 marks)

14
*P68386A01432*
10 The photograph shows a large hurdle on an athletics track.

bar

© Sony Ho/Shutterstock
(a) The bar of the hurdle is made of wood and is painted black and white.
The temperature of the hurdle increases when the Sun shines on it.
Explain which part of the bar reaches the highest temperature.
(2)

26
*P68386A02632*
(b) The air near the bar receives energy by heating.
Explain how a convection current is formed in the air near the bar.
(4)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 10 = 6 marks)

27
*P68386A02732* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Tuesday 12 January 2021

Morning (Time: 2 hours) Paper Reference 4PH1/1PR 4SD0/1PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
Paper: 1PR
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, protractor, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all steps in any calculations and state the units.
• your
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box
mind about an answer, put a line through the box
. If you change
and then mark
your new answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Try to answer every question.
• Check your answers if you have time at the end.
Turn over

P68387A
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/
*P68387A0132*
Answer ALL questions.
1 (a) The boxes give some situations and some energy stores.
Draw one straight line from each situation to the energy store that decreases for
that situation.
The first one has been done for you.
(4)

Situation Energy store

a beaker of water cooling down elastic

a car moving horizontally and

kinetic
slowing down

a ball falling towards the

thermal
ground

a nucleus splitting due to fission nuclear

a stretched rubber band

gravitational
decreasing in length

4
*P68387A0432*
(b) Energy is transferred when a filament lamp is connected to a battery.
(i) Which method of energy transfer takes place between the battery and the lamp?
(1)
A electrical

B heating

C mechanical

D radiation

(ii) Which method of energy transfer takes place between the lamp and the surroundings?
(1)
A electrical

B light radiation

C mechanical

D sound radiation

(Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

5
*P68387A0532* Turn over
5 A student does an investigation to show how the velocity of a toy car changes when
the car rolls down a ramp onto a table and hits a wooden block.
The graph shows how the velocity of the toy car changes with time.

3
Velocity
in m/s
2

0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6

Time in seconds

(a) Calculate the distance travelled by the car during the first 0.4 seconds.
(4)

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

12
*P68387A01232*
(b) (i) Calculate the acceleration of the car between 0.40 s and 0.45 s.
(3)

acceleration = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

(ii) State the formula linking resultant force, mass and acceleration.
(1)

(iii) The car has a mass of 0.13 kg.

Calculate the resultant force on the car as it slows down.
(2)

resultant force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(c) A piece of soft material is fixed to the front of the toy car.
Explain how this will affect the gradient of the velocity-time graph after the car
hits the block.
(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 13 marks)

13
*P68387A01332* Turn over
7 A glass contains fizzy water.
Bubbles of carbon dioxide form at the bottom of the glass and rise to the surface.
(a) The graph shows the relationship between the volume of a bubble and the
pressure of the gas in the bubble.

pressure

volume

(i) Describe the relationship shown by the graph.

(2)

(ii) State the formula linking pressure difference, height, gravitational field strength
and density.
(1)

16
*P68387A01632*
(iii) The depth of the fizzy water in the glass is 22 cm.
The density of the fizzy water is 1080 kg/m3.
Calculate the pressure difference at the bottom of the glass due to the fizzy water.
(2)

pressure difference = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pa

(iv) Calculate the pressure of the gas in the bubble when the bubble is at the
bottom of the glass.
[atmospheric pressure = 101 000 Pa]
(1)

pressure = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pa
(v) When a bubble is at the top of the glass, the pressure of the gas in the bubble
is equal to 101 000 Pa and the bubble has a volume of 0.084 cm3.
Calculate the volume of the gas in the bubble when the bubble is at the
bottom of the glass.
Assume the temperature of the gas remains constant.
(3)

volume = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3

17
*P68387A01732* Turn over
(b) A force called upthrust acts vertically upwards on the bubble.
When the bubble is released, it accelerates vertically upwards.
Draw two labelled arrows on the diagram to show the forces on the bubble as it
is released.
(3)

bubble

(Total for Question 7 = 12 marks)

18
*P68387A01832*
11 A student uses this apparatus to investigate the force needed to pull a block along a ramp.

0.89 m

26 N
0.11 m ramp
block

ground

(a) (i) State the formula linking work done, force and distance moved in the
direction of the force.
(1)

(ii) The student pulls the block 0.89 m along the ramp with a force of 26 N.
Show that the work done on the block by the 26 N force is about 23 J.
(2)

(iii) The block has a mass of 1.3 kg and moves vertically upwards 0.11 m.
Calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy (GPE) store of the
block between the bottom and the top of the ramp.
(3)

increase in GPE = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

26
*P68387A02632*
(iv) Explain why the work done to move the block along the ramp is greater than
the increase in the GPE store of the block.
(2)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The student suggests it is better to use a less steep ramp to raise the block
through the same vertical height.
Discuss an advantage and a disadvantage of using a less steep ramp.
(4)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 11 = 12 marks)

27
*P68387A02732* Turn over
12 The diagram shows some apparatus used to find the mass of an object.
The two pieces of metal foil act as a variable resistor.
When more mass is added, the elastic string stretches and the small piece of metal
foil moves to the right.

screw

elastic string pulley

metal foil
metal foil

ammeter
mass
cell resistor

28
*P68387A02832*
(a) (i) Draw the circuit diagram for this electrical circuit.
The variable resistor has been drawn for you.
(4)

(ii) Draw a voltmeter on the diagram to measure the voltage of the

variable resistor.
(2)
(b) Explain how the voltage across the variable resistor changes if more mass is
added to the end of the elastic string.
(4)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29
*P68387A02932* Turn over
(c) The student extends the investigation by keeping the mass constant and
replacing the cell with a variable power supply.
The student measures the current in the circuit for different voltages.
These are the results.

Voltage Current
in V in mA

0.0 0.0
2.0 4.0
4.0 7.0
6.0 11.0
8.0 14.0

(i) State the independent variable in the student’s investigation.

(1)

(ii) Plot the student’s results on the grid.

(3)
(iii) Draw a line of best fit.
(1)

30
*P68387A03032*
(Total for Question 12 = 15 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 110 MARKS

31
*P68387A03132*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 15 January 2021

Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2P

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• mind
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
about an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P68388A
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/
*P68388A0124*
3 A student uses this apparatus to investigate moments.

elastic bands at
15 cm intervals

newton meter

force applied

base of
clamp stand

This is the student’s method.

• attach elastic bands at 15 cm intervals on a one metre tall clamp stand
• attach a newton meter to the highest elastic band and measure the
horizontal force required to tilt the stand
• repeat the method at each 15 cm interval
(a) Name an instrument that the student should use to accurately measure the
distances on the clamp stand.
(1)

7
*P68388A0724* Turn over
(b) The table shows the student’s results.

Distance Force applied

in cm in N

15.0 10.0

30.0 5.6

45.0

60.0 2.6

75.0 2.2

90.0 1.8

(i) The photograph shows the reading on the newton meter when the
distance is 45.0 cm.

Use the photograph to determine the force required to tilt the stand when the
distance is 45.0 cm.
(1)

force = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(ii) Give a reason why this newton meter is unsuitable for measuring the force for
distances less than 15.0 cm.
(1)

(c) (i) Plot a graph of the student’s results on the grid.

(3)
(ii) Draw the curve of best fit.
(1)

8
*P68388A0824*
(d) The student concludes that the moment required to tilt the clamp stand does not
change when the distance is varied.
Use data from the table or the graph to evaluate the student’s conclusion.
(4)

(Total for Question 3 = 11 marks)

9
*P68388A0924* Turn over
4 The bar chart gives information about how some of the electrical power in the United
States of America (USA) was generated in the year 2018.

Percentage of
electrical power 20
generated (%)

0
Coal Natural Nuclear Solar Water Wind
gas
Energy resource

(a) Most of the electricity generated in the USA uses non-renewable energy resources.
(i) State what is meant by the term non-renewable.
(1)

(ii) Determine the percentage of electrical power generated using the

non-renewable energy resources shown on the bar chart.
(2)

percentage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . %

10
*P68388A01024*
(b) In 2018, the USA generated more than half of its electrical power by burning
fossil fuels.
Explain one way that burning fossil fuels can be harmful to the environment.
(2)

(c) The mean total electrical power output of the USA in 2018 was 4.76 × 1011 W.
(i) Calculate the mean electrical power output from solar energy resources.
(2)

mean electrical power output = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W

11
*P68388A01124* Turn over
(ii) The mean total electrical power output of the USA in 2018 was 4.76 × 1011 W.
A typical solar farm generates 250 W of electrical power for every 1.0 m2 of
land area used.
Calculate the amount of land area needed if the USA were to generate all of
its electrical power using solar energy resources.
(2)

land area = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m2

(iii) The total land area of the USA is 9.83 × 1012 m2.
Discuss whether the USA could generate all of its electrical power using solar
energy resources.
(3)

(Total for Question 4 = 12 marks)

12
*P68388A01224*
7 The diagram shows a child’s toy for accelerating steel balls.

magnet
ball A ball B
ball C

This is how the toy works.

• the toy uses three identical steel balls, each with a mass of 4.1 g
• ball A moves towards the magnet
• ball B is in contact with the magnet
• balls B and C are initially at rest and are in contact with each other
• when ball A collides with the magnet, ball C moves away from the magnet

(a) Ball A moves towards the magnet with an initial velocity of 0.15 m/s.
Calculate the initial momentum of ball A.
(2)

initial momentum = ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m/s

(b) Ball A is attracted to the magnet.
Explain how this attraction affects the momentum of ball A as it approaches
the magnet.
(2)

18
*P68388A01824*
(c) When ball A collides with the magnet, a force of 1.3 N is exerted on ball C for a
time of 0.0025 s.
This causes ball C to move away from the magnet.
Calculate the change in velocity of ball C due to this force.
(3)

change in velocity = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(Total for Question 7 = 7 marks)

19
*P68388A01924* Turn over
8 The diagram shows a simplified view of part of an inkjet printer.

negatively charged
ink drop

– – +
– +

negatively charged
– + positively charged
plate plate
– +
– +
– +
paper

A negatively charged ink drop falls vertically between a pair of charged plates.
(a) The ink drop experiences a horizontal electrostatic force as it falls.
Explain the direction of the electrostatic force exerted on the ink drop by the
charged plates.
(2)

(b) On the diagram, draw the path of the ink drop as it falls between the charged plates
until it hits the paper.
(2)

20
*P68388A02024*
(c) (i) The ink drop experiences a horizontal force of 8.5 × 10–7 N when it is between
the charged plates.
The mass of the ink drop is 1.1 × 10–10 kg.
Calculate the horizontal acceleration of the ink drop when it is between the
charged plates.
(3)

acceleration = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

(ii) The ink drop has no initial horizontal velocity before it passes between the
charged plates.
After passing between the charged plates, the horizontal velocity of the ink
drop is 3.9 m/s.
Calculate the horizontal distance travelled by the ink drop as it passes
between the charged plates.
Give your answer in mm.
(4)

distance = ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm

21
*P68388A02124* Turn over
(d) Explain how another ink drop could be deflected in the opposite direction by a
greater distance using the charged plates in the inkjet printer.
(2)

(Total for Question 8 = 13 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

22
*P68388A02224*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 15 January 2021

Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• mind
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
about an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P68389A
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/
*P68389A0120*
Answer ALL questions.

1 The diagram shows the temperature-time graph for a substance which is heated at a
constant rate.

S T
80

Temperature
in °C –20 Q Time
R

–70
P

(a) (i) Which section of the graph shows when the substance is melting?
(1)
A PQ
B QR

C RS

D ST

(ii) Which section of the graph shows when all the substance is a solid?
(1)
A PQ
B QR

C RS

D ST

(iii) Draw particles in the box to show the arrangement of particles when the
substance is a gas.
(1)

4
*P68389A0420*
(iv) Which of these statements best describes the motion of particles in a gas?
(1)
A they vibrate about fixed points

B they are stationary

C they slide past each other

D they move quickly and randomly

(b) (i) Name a piece of apparatus that could be used to measure the temperature of
the substance.
(1)

(ii) Determine the boiling point of this substance.

(1)

boiling point = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(c) The substance has a mass of 1.2 kg.

Calculate the energy required to raise the temperature of the substance from
10 °C to 37 °C.
[assume specific heat capacity of substance = 840 J/kg °C]
(3)

energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 1 = 9 marks)

5
*P68389A0520* Turn over
2 The diagram shows a metal block on top of a wooden block.
The metal block is held stationary by force F.

G metal
block

P
4.3 cm

wooden 11 cm
block
force F

(a) (i) The weight of the metal block acts through point G.
Give the name of point G.
(1)

(ii) Name a piece of apparatus that could be used to measure the weight of the
metal block.
(1)

6
*P68389A0620*
(b) (i) State the formula linking moment, force and perpendicular distance from the pivot.
(1)

(ii) The weight of the metal block is 0.68 N.

Show that the moment of the weight of the metal block about point P is
approximately 2.9 N cm.
(1)

(iii) Force F is applied to the metal block to stop it from moving.

Calculate the magnitude of force F.
(3)

force F = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(Total for Question 2 = 7 marks)

7
*P68389A0720* Turn over
3 The diagram shows an air track that can be used to investigate motion without friction.
Air comes out through a series of small holes in the air track, which lifts the gliders
slightly above the track.
There are two gliders on the track.
Each glider has a magnet.

0.045 kg m/s magnet magnet

A B

glider B
glider A
(at rest)
air in
air track

The poles of the magnets nearest each other are alike.

(a) Explain the direction of the force acting on magnet A from magnet B.
(2)

(b) The gliders collide and the magnets cause them to rebound.
Before the collision, the momentum of glider A is 0.045 kg m/s to the right and
glider B is at rest.
(i) State the total momentum of glider A and glider B after the collision.
(1)

total momentum = ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m/s

8
*P68389A0820*
(ii) After the collision, the momentum of glider A is 0.021 kg m/s to the left.
Calculate the momentum of glider B after the collision.
(2)

momentum of glider B = ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m/s

(iii) The time taken for glider B to change its momentum is 0.19 seconds.
Calculate the average force on glider B that causes this change in momentum.
(2)

average force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(iv) Give the direction of the force on glider B from glider A.

(1)

(Total for Question 3 = 8 marks)

9
*P68389A0920* Turn over
7 The diagram shows part of a device used to demonstrate electrostatic charge.

water in

metal metal
A B
bucket V bucket

rubber mat

(a) Negatively charged water droplets fall into bucket A.

Describe how bucket A becomes negatively charged.
(2)

(b) Explain why the negatively charged droplets spread out as they fall.
(2)

14
*P68389A01420*
(c) (i) A droplet hits bucket A with a speed of 3.8 m/s.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the droplet when it hits bucket A.
[mass of droplet = 6.2 × 10–9 kg]
(3)

kinetic energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(ii) The total charge stored in bucket A is –1.1 × 10–10 C.

This charge passes through the air between the buckets in 9.2 × 10–3 s,
causing a spark between bucket A and bucket B.
Calculate the mean current between the buckets.
(3)

mean current = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

(iii) The spark transfers a charge of –1.1 × 10–10 C.

The mean voltage between the buckets is 1.7 kV.
Calculate the energy transferred by the spark.
(3)

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 7 = 13 marks)

15
*P68389A01520* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)
Paper
Time 2 hours
reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P

Physics
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler, protractor

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centre
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• mind
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
about an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Try to answer every question.
• Good luck
Check your answers if you have time at the end.
• with your examination.
Turn over

P67159A
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1/
*P67159A0128*
4 The diagram shows a velocity-time graph for a car from the time the driver sees an
obstacle in the road until the car comes to rest.

30
Velocity
20
in m/s
10

0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0

Time in seconds

(a) (i) Calculate the acceleration of the car between 1.8 and 8.0 seconds.
(3)

acceleration = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

(ii) Calculate the braking distance of the car.
(3)

braking distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

10
*P67159A01028*
(iii) Explain the effect, if any, of increased driver tiredness on the thinking distance
and on the braking distance of the car.
(4)

thinking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................... ................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... ................................................................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................ ................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... ................................................................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Which of these represents the distance-time graph for the car?
(1)

Distance Distance

A B

Time Time

Distance Distance

C D

Time Time

(Total for Question 4 = 11 marks)

11
*P67159A01128* Turn over
5 The diagram shows a circuit used to investigate the relationship between current and
voltage for a light-emitting diode (LED).

variable
power supply
+ −

270 Ω

(a) Draw meters on the diagram to measure the voltage of the LED and the current in the LED.
(3)

13
*P67159A01328* Turn over
(b) The table shows the results of the investigation.

Voltage in V Current in mA
0.00 0.0
0.30 0.5
0.35 2.5
0.40 1.5
0.45 2.0
0.50 4.5
0.55 9.0
0.60 15.0

(i) Plot the results on the grid.

(3)
(ii) One of the results is anomalous.
On the graph, draw a circle around the anomalous result.
(1)
(iii) Draw a curve of best fit.
(1)

14
*P67159A01428*
(iv) Give a reason why a line graph is the best way of showing these results.
(1)

(v) State the formula linking voltage, current and resistance.

(1)

(vi) Any current larger than 15 mA will permanently damage the LED.
The resistor in the circuit has a resistance of 270 Ω.
Use the results from the investigation to determine the maximum voltage of
the power supply without damaging the LED.
(4)

maximum voltage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

(Total for Question 5 = 14 marks)

15
*P67159A01528* Turn over
6 The diagram shows a container of water.
The container has a heater in the bottom corner, a temperature sensor and a lid.

lid

temperature
sensor

heater

(a) Explain how a convection current is formed in the container.

You may add to the diagram or draw your own diagram to support your answer.
(4)

16
*P67159A01628*
(b) The graph shows how the temperature sensor reading changes with time.
It shows the change in temperature when the container is full of water and when
the container is empty.

Key
Temperature container empty
container full

Time

(i) Describe the relationship between temperature and time when the container
is full of water.
(2)

(ii) Explain the differences between the two curves on the graph.
(3)

(Total for Question 6 = 9 marks)

17
*P67159A01728* Turn over
9 The photograph shows a whale jumping out of the surface of the sea.

(Source: © Alexander Baumann/Shutterstock)

(a) At the top of the jump, the whale’s velocity is 0 m/s.

The whale falls 2.2 m from the top of the jump to the surface of the sea.
Calculate the velocity of the whale when it hits the surface of the sea.
(4)

velocity = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

22
*P67159A02228*
(b) A resultant force causes the whale to slow down when it hits the surface of the sea.
(i) Draw an arrow to show this resultant force.
(1)

(Source: © Eugenia Petrovskaya/Shutterstock)

(ii) The resultant force acting on the whale is 18 000 N.

The mass of the whale is 4100 kg.
Calculate the acceleration of the whale.
(3)

acceleration = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

(Total for Question 9 = 8 marks)

23
*P67159A02328* Turn over
10 The diagram shows a device called a hydraulic lift.
The hydraulic lift consists of a tube of oil with a piston at each end.

piston X piston Y

cross-sectional area
1.2 m2
cross-sectional area
4.8 m2
57 cm

oil

(a) Calculate the pressure difference between the bottom of piston X and the bottom
of the oil.
[density of oil = 820 kg/m3]
(3)

pressure difference = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pa

(b) A 24 kg mass is placed on piston X.
(i) Calculate the weight of the 24 kg mass.
Give the unit.
(3)

weight = .............................................................. unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24
*P67159A02428*
(ii) Calculate the extra pressure on the oil due to the mass.
(2)

extra pressure = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pa

(iii) The oil transfers the same extra pressure to piston Y.
Calculate the force acting upwards on piston Y due to the extra pressure.
(3)

force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
(c) Piston Y starts at rest, rises slowly and then comes to rest.
State how the following energy stores have changed from before the motion to
after the motion is complete.
(4)

Energy store Change

gravitational potential energy

of piston X

gravitational potential energy

of piston Y

chemical energy of piston Y

kinetic energy of piston Y

(Total for Question 10 = 15 marks)

25
*P67159A02528* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes

Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P67161A
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/
*P67161A0124*
2 Two students investigate the speed of sound.
Student A has a device that makes a loud sound.
Student B has a stopwatch.
A sound wave travels from student A to the wall and is reflected back to student B.

not to scale wall

210 metres

120 metres

A B

(a) Calculate the total distance the sound wave travels from student A to the wall and
back to student B.
(1)

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
(b) Student B hears the sound before and after the sound wave reflects from the wall.
When student B hears the sound before reflection, he starts the stopwatch.
When student B hears the sound after reflection, he stops the stopwatch.
The students repeat this experiment five times.
The table shows the students’ results.

Time in s
0.50 0.62 0.52 0.58 0.55

Calculate the mean (average) time.

Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
(2)

mean time = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

6
*P67161A0624*
(c) Calculate the speed of sound for this investigation.
(4)

speed = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(d) Suggest a reason why the students’ results are not always the same.
(1)

(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

7
*P67161A0724* Turn over
3 The diagram shows part of a radio antenna.
The plastic tube protects the radio antenna from bad weather.
Dust particles carried by the wind rub against the plastic tube.
After some time, the dust particles cause the tube to become positively charged.

plastic tube

antenna

metal mast

wire attached
to Earth

(a) State the property of plastic that allows it to become electrostatically charged.
(1)

(b) Explain how the plastic tube becomes positively charged.

(2)

8
*P67161A0824*
(c) The plastic tube is attached to a metal mast.
This would cause the metal mast to become positively charged.
Explain why there is a wire connecting the metal mast to the Earth.
(3)

(d) The plastic tube gains a charge of 4.3 mC.

The energy stored on the tube is 3.7 J.
Calculate the voltage between the plastic tube and the metal mast.
(3)

voltage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
(e) An engineer is working on the radio antenna.
Describe the hazard to the engineer if there is no earth wire.
(2)

(Total for Question 3 = 11 marks)

9
*P67161A0924* Turn over
5 The diagram shows some of the apparatus a student uses to investigate the effect of
heating a solid substance.

12 V supply

lid
insulating material

beaker
thermometer
solid substance

electrical heater

(a) Describe how the student could use their apparatus to help determine the
specific heat capacity of the substance.
You should give details of any additional apparatus needed in your answer.
(5)

15
*P67161A01524* Turn over
(b) The student continues to heat the substance, keeping the power of the heater constant.
The graph shows how the temperature of the substance changes with time.

Temperature
in °C
30

0
0
Time

(i) Use the graph to determine the melting point of this substance.
(1)

melting point = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(ii) Describe, in terms of particles, what is happening in the substance when the
graph line is horizontal.
(2)

16
*P67161A01624*
(iii) Suggest why the two non-horizontal lines on the graph have different gradients.
(2)

(Total for Question 5 = 10 marks)

17
*P67161A01724* Turn over
7 The diagram shows two blocks at rest on a table, viewed from above.
A spring is attached to the large block.
The small block is attached by a piece of string to a fixed point on the table.
A student pushes the two blocks together so that the spring is compressed.

fixed point

large block small block

mass 75 g mass 17 g

spring

(a) The student releases the blocks.

The kinetic energy (KE) store of the small block is 0.29 J when the blocks are no
longer in contact.
Show that the speed of the small block is about 6 m/s.
(3)

20
*P67161A02024*
(b) Using ideas about momentum, show that the speed of the large block is
about 1 m/s after the blocks are no longer in contact.
(4)

(c) The small block takes 0.11 s to reach 6 m/s.

Calculate the mean force exerted on the small block by the spring.
(3)

mean force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

QUESTION 7 CONTINUES ON NEXT PAGE

21
*P67161A02124* Turn over
(d) The small block then moves around the fixed point on the table.
The block moves in a circular orbit of radius 17.6 cm at a constant orbital speed of 6 m/s.
The time period of the orbit can be found using the formula

2π × orbital radius
orbital speed =
time period

Calculate the time period of the orbit.

(3)

time period = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(Total for Question 7 = 13 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

22
*P67161A02224*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Wednesday 20 May 2020

Afternoon (Time: 2 hours) Paper Reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) /4SD0
Paper: 1P
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P65064A
©2020 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1
*P65064A0132*
2 This question is about the movement of a train.
The diagram shows the train on a track.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The train starts braking at point P and stops moving at point Q.

 P Q

The graph shows how the train’s velocity changes with time as the train travels from P to Q.
50

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
40

30
Velocity
in m/s

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Time in s DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6
*P65064A0632*
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the train.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

acceleration = ………………………………………… m/s2

(b) Calculate the distance travelled by the train from P to Q.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

distance = ………………………………………… m

(c) Draw a line on the graph to show how the train’s velocity will change if its initial velocity
is the same but the braking force is lower.

(2)

(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

7
*P65064A0732* Turn over
4 (a) (i) State Hooke’s Law.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) The graph shows how the extension of a rubber band varies with the force applied.

Extension
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Force

Explain how the graph shows that the rubber band does not obey Hooke’s Law.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

9
*P65064A0932* Turn over
(b) Diagram 1 shows a model aeroplane powered by a rubber band.

propeller

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

rubber band

Diagram 1
A person rotates the propeller of the model aeroplane, which twists the rubber band.
He then releases the propeller and it spins.
Energy transfer occurs during this process.
The box lists words associated with energy.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
kinetic gravitational electrostatic
mechanical elastic magnetic
heating chemical radiation

Use words from the box to complete the passage.

(3)

The person does . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................... work to twist the rubber band.

As the person twists the rubber band it extends, increasing the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

energy store of the rubber band. When the rubber band is released it does mechanical work,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

increasing the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................................... energy store of the propeller.

10
*P65064A01032*
(c) Diagram 2 shows the aeroplane flying horizontally to the right.

lift
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

thrust

Diagram 2
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The aeroplane flies at a constant speed.

Diagram 2 shows two forces acting on the aeroplane.

Draw labelled arrows on diagram 2 to show two more forces acting on the aeroplane.
(4)

(Total for Question 4 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11
*P65064A01132* Turn over
5 A student does an investigation to determine the current-voltage graph for an
unknown component, X.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The student uses this equipment

• component X
• cell
• variable resistor
• ammeter
• voltmeter
• connecting wires
(a) Complete the circuit diagram to show how the student should set up this equipment
for her investigation.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

component X
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
*P65064A01332* Turn over
(b) The student completes her investigation.
The table shows her results.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Voltage in V Current in mA
0.00 0
0.10 0
0.20 0
0.30 0
0.40 0
0.50 2
0.60 8
0.70 33
0.80 140

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(i) Plot a graph of the student’s results on the grid.
Plot current on the y-axis and voltage on the x-axis.
(3)
(ii) Draw a curve of best fit.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

14
*P65064A01432*
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) State the name of component X.

(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 5 = 9 marks)

15
*P65064A01532* Turn over
6 The diagram shows an electric circuit.

6.0 V

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6.8 mA

490 Ω

(a) When the thermistor is in hot water, its resistance is 490 Ω.

Show that the resistance of the fixed resistor is about 400 Ω.
(5)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(b) Explain how the voltage across the fixed resistor changes when the hot water is
replaced with cold water.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 6 = 8 marks)

16
*P65064A01632*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Wednesday 20 May 2020

Afternoon (Time: 2 hours) Paper Reference 4PH1/1PR 4SD0/1PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
Paper: 1PR
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P65065A
©2020 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1
*P65065A0136*
5 A toaster is an electrical device used for toasting bread.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The toaster contains thin metal wires.

These wires get hot when there is a current in them.
The wires transfer energy to the bread by heating and by radiation.
(a) Give a reason why the wires in the toaster are connected in parallel.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

12
*P65065A01236*
(b) (i) State the formula linking power, current and voltage.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) The power rating of the toaster is 2.8 kW.

Calculate the total current in the toaster.
[mains voltage = 230 V]
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

current = ................................................................................... A
(iii) The toaster contains 48 thin metal wires.
Calculate the current in each of the thin metal wires.
(1)

current = ................................................................................... A

(Total for Question 5 = 6 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
*P65065A01336* Turn over
6 A student needs to identify a sample of an unknown liquid.
She decides to do this by finding the density of the liquid.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) Describe how the student should measure the mass of the liquid.
(2)

(b) Describe how the student should use a measuring cylinder to obtain an accurate
measurement of the liquid’s volume.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

14
*P65065A01436*
(c) The table gives the values of the densities for some liquids.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Liquid Density in g/cm3

brine 1.23
glucose 1.44
olive oil 0.82
pure water 1.00
sodium hydroxide 1.25
sunflower oil 0.92

The student measures the mass of the sample of unknown liquid as 150 g and the
volume as 163 cm3.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Deduce the name of the unknown liquid.

(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 7 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15
*P65065A01536* Turn over
7 The photographs show two different breeds of cat.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Cat X Cat Y

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Cat X has no fur and light-coloured skin.
Cat Y has thick, black fur.
Both cats have the same body temperature and transfer energy to their surroundings
when they are outside on a cold day.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

16
*P65065A01636*
Compare how cat X and cat Y transfer energy to their surroundings.
Refer to conduction, convection and radiation in your answer.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(6)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 7 = 6 marks)

17
*P65065A01736* Turn over
8 A student uses this apparatus to investigate how the efficiency of an electric motor
varies with its input voltage.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

d.c. power joulemeter

supply
electric motor

metre
rule

1.0 kg mass

This is the student’s method.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

• connect the electric motor to a d.c. power supply and a joulemeter

• attach a 1.0 kg mass to the electric motor using a length of string
• set the voltage of the power supply to 10 V and switch on the power supply
• switch off the power supply when the mass has been lifted through a distance of 50 cm
• record the input energy to the motor from the joulemeter
• calculate the energy transferred to the gravitational store of the mass
• calculate the efficiency of the motor
The student repeats this process, setting the power supply to a different voltage
each time.
(a) State how the student could improve the reliability of her results.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) Give two control variables for the investigation.

(2)

1 ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
*P65065A01936* Turn over
(c) Show that the gravitational store of the 1.0 kg mass increases by 5.0 J when it is lifted
through a distance of 50 cm.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(d) The table shows the student’s results.

Power supply voltage Joulemeter reading

Motor efficiency (%)
in V in J

3.0 99.4 5.0

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
3.5 25.5 19.6

4.0 16.5 30.3

5.0 13.5 37.0

6.0 12.6 39.7

8.0 12.8 39.1

10.0 12.7

(i) Calculate the motor efficiency when the power supply is set to a voltage of 10 V.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

efficiency = ................................................................................... %

20
*P65065A02036*
(ii) Plot a graph of the motor efficiency on the y-axis against the power supply voltage
on the x-axis.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) Draw a curve of best fit.

(2)
(iv) Using the graph, determine the minimum power supply voltage that will allow
the electric motor to operate at maximum efficiency.
(1)
power supply voltage = ................................................................................... V
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 8 = 14 marks)

21
*P65065A02136* Turn over
9 The diagram shows part of a circuit used for an outdoor lighting system.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

12 V

4500 Ω
component X

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) Draw a voltmeter on the diagram to measure the voltage of the 4500 Ω resistor.
(2)
(b) Give the name of component X.
(1)

(c) The voltage across component X is 3.0 V.

(i) Calculate the voltage across the 4500 Ω resistor.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

voltage = ................................................................................... V
(ii) Calculate the current in the circuit.
[voltage = current × resistance]
(2)

current = ................................................................................... A

22
*P65065A02236*
(iii) Calculate the resistance of component X.
Give your answer in kΩ.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

resistance = ................................................................................... kΩ
(d) Explain where a lamp should be connected in this circuit, so that the voltage across it
increases as the light received by component X decreases.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 9 = 12 marks)

23
*P65065A02336* Turn over
11 The graph shows how the thinking distance and braking distance of a car vary with
its initial speed.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Key

thinking distance
60
braking distance

Distance
40
in m

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Initial speed in m/s

(a) A car has an initial speed of 35 m/s.

The brakes are applied and the car comes to a complete stop in the braking distance
shown by the graph.
Calculate the mean braking acceleration of the car.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

braking acceleration = ................................................................................... m/s2

28
*P65065A02836*
(b) Evaluate how the thinking distance and the braking distance vary for different values
of initial speed.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Refer to information from the graph in your answer.

(5)

(Total for Question 11 = 9 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

29
*P65065A02936* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 12 June 2020

Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2P

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• mind
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
about an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P65066A
©2020 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1
*P65066A0124*
Answer ALL questions.
1 This question is about liquid nitrogen.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) (i) The diagram shows the arrangement of particles in solid nitrogen.
Draw the arrangement of particles in liquid nitrogen.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
solid liquid
(ii) Describe the motion of the particles in liquid nitrogen.
(1)

(b) A teacher uses this method to find the density of liquid nitrogen.
• measure the mass of a container
• pour liquid nitrogen into the container
• measure the total mass of the container and the liquid nitrogen
• read the volume of the liquid nitrogen from the scale on the side of the container
(i) Give a safety precaution the teacher should take when pouring the liquid nitrogen.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

(ii) State the name of the apparatus that the teacher should use to measure the mass
of the container.
(1)

4
*P65066A0424*
(iii) The table shows the teacher’s results.

mass of container in g 75
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

mass of container + liquid nitrogen in g 149

volume of liquid nitrogen in cm3 88

Calculate the mass of liquid nitrogen in the container.

(1)

mass = ........................................................ g
(iv) State the formula linking density, mass and volume.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(v) Calculate the density of the liquid nitrogen.

Give a suitable unit.
(3)

density = ......................................................... unit = ................................. . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

5
*P65066A0524* Turn over
(c) Over time, the liquid nitrogen warms up and changes state from a liquid into a gas.
Describe the changes to the arrangement and motion of particles when the liquid

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

nitrogen changes state.
(3)

(Total for Question 1 = 13 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6
*P65066A0624*
2 This question is about a demonstration to show the link between current and charge.

The diagram shows two metal plates, X and Y, with a metal ball moving between them.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

insulating thread

X Y

metal 3 kV power supply

ball + −

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) The two metal plates have no charge before the power supply is connected.
When plate Y is connected to the positive terminal of the power supply, the plate
becomes positively charged.
Explain how plate Y gains a positive charge.
(2)

(b) (i) The metal ball becomes positively charged when it touches plate Y.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The metal ball then moves away from plate Y towards plate X.
Explain why the metal ball moves away from plate Y.
(2)

8
*P65066A0824*
(ii) Give a reason why the ball is made of metal.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(c) When the metal ball moves away from plate Y to plate X, a charge of 5.1 × 10-6 C
is transferred.
(i) State the formula linking charge transferred, current and time taken.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the current if the metal ball takes 0.45 seconds to travel from plate Y
to plate X.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

current = .......................................................... A
(iii) Suggest why the current increases if the voltage of the power supply is increased.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iv) Give the name of the apparatus that can be used to measure current.
(1)

(Total for Question 2 = 10 marks)

9
*P65066A0924* Turn over
3 The diagram shows some of the forces acting on a large rubbish bin on wheels.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

not to scale

weight

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
98 cm

37 cm

(a) The weight of the bin acts through point G.

Give the name of point G.
(1)

(b) The mass of the bin is 23 kg.

(i) What is the weight of the bin?
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A 23 kg DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

B 230 kg

C 230 N

D 23 000 N

10
*P65066A01024*
(ii) State the principle of moments.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) A person applies force F to the bin to keep it stationary.

Calculate the magnitude of force F.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

magnitude of force F = ......................................................... N

(iv) State the magnitude and direction of the force applied to the person by the bin.
(2)

magnitude = ......................................................... N

direction = ...................................................... . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 3 = 9 marks)

11
*P65066A01124* Turn over
4 The photograph shows a solar power farm.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using solar power rather than fossil fuels
to generate electricity.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

12
*P65066A01224*
(b) Solar panels produce direct current (d.c.).
The National Grid in many countries operates on alternating current (a.c.).
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Describe the difference between direct current (d.c.) and alternating current (a.c.).
(2)

(Total for Question 4 = 6 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
*P65066A01324* Turn over
6 The Parker Solar Probe is a spacecraft that was launched in 2018 on a mission to explore
the Sun.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The spacecraft is partly covered in tiles.
These tiles are filled with a solid containing small pockets of trapped air.
The outer surface of the tiles is painted white.
These tiles protect the electric circuits in the spacecraft from extreme temperatures.
(a) The diagram shows one of these tiles in cross-section.

outer surface
of tile solid containing
small pockets of inner surface
trapped air of tile

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(i) Explain why the outer surface of the tile is painted white.
(2)

(ii) Explain how the small pockets of trapped air help to reduce thermal energy
transfer from the outer surface to the inner surface of the tile.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

16
*P65066A01624*
(b) The electric circuits inside the spacecraft are cooled by 4.5 kg of water.
The initial temperature of the water is 35 oC.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The thermal store of the water increases by 210 kJ.

Calculate the final temperature of the water.
[specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J/kg oC]
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

final temperature = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oC

(Total for Question 6 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

17
*P65066A01724* Turn over
8 Welding is a process where pieces of metal are melted and then joined together.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The diagram shows apparatus used for welding.

plug

transformer

input
current

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
output
current

The welding apparatus uses the transformer to decrease the voltage from 230 V.
(a) State the name of this type of transformer.
(1)

(b) State the formula linking the turns ratio, the input voltage and the output voltage
for a transformer.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P65066A02224*
(c) The table gives some information about the transformer.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

input voltage in V 230

number of turns on input coil 16
number of turns on output coil 4
input current in A 11

(i) Use information from the table to calculate the output current of the transformer.
Assume that the transformer is 100% efficient.
(5)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

current = ............................. A

(ii) A fuse is installed in the plug which supplies the input current.
Which fuse should be used in this plug?
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A 3A

B 5A

C 10 A

D 13 A

(Total for Question 8 = 8 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

23
*P65066A02324*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 12 June 2020

Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P65067A
©2020 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1
*P65067A0120*
Answer ALL questions.
1 This question is about electrostatics.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) A student uses a plastic rod to investigate electrostatics.

(i) Describe how the student could have charged the plastic rod.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) The student uses a meter to measure the amount of charge on the rod.
The meter displays a reading of –5.2 mC.
Which of these is the same as –5.2 mC?
(1)

A –0.52 C

B –0.052 C

C –0.0052 C

D –0.00052 C
(iii) The rod is negatively charged.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Which statement correctly explains why the rod is negatively charged? DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)

A the rod has gained negatively charged electrons

B the rod has gained positively charged electrons

C the rod has lost negatively charged electrons

D the rod has lost positively charged electrons

4
*P65067A0420*
(iv) Using a meter is one method of demonstrating that the rod is charged.
Describe another method of demonstrating that the rod is charged.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

(b) Electrostatic charges can be useful but they can also be dangerous.
(i) Give one use of electrostatic charges.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Explain why electrostatic charges can be dangerous when fuelling an aeroplane.
(2)

(Total for Question 1 = 9 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

5
*P65067A0520* Turn over
3 A builder needs to lift a large stone block.
(a) Diagram 1 shows the stone block.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
weight

Diagram 1
(i) Draw an X on diagram 1 at the centre of gravity of the stone block.
(1)
(ii) State the formula linking weight, mass and gravitational field strength.
(1)

(iii) The mass of the stone block is 130 kg.

Calculate the weight of the stone block.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

weight = ......................................................... N

8
*P65067A0820*
(b) The builder uses a wooden plank to lift the large stone block.
The plank is uniform and pivoted at its centre.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The builder pushes down on one end of the plank to lift the stone block.
Diagram 2 shows the plank when it is horizontal and stationary.

0.30 m distance X

weight 520 N

Diagram 2
(i) State the principle of moments.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

(ii) The builder is pushing down with a force of 520 N to keep the plank horizontal.
Calculate distance X.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

distance X = .......................................................... m
(iii) Calculate the length of the plank.
(1)

length of plank = .......................................................... m

(Total for Question 3 = 10 marks)

9
*P65067A0920* Turn over
5 Energy is transferred from the Sun to the Earth.

(a) Nuclear fusion happens in the Sun.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Which energy store of the Sun decreases during nuclear fusion?
(1)

A chemical

B kinetic

C nuclear

D thermal

(ii) How is energy transferred through space from the Sun to the Earth?
(1)

A by heating

B by radiation

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
C electrically

D mechanically

(b) Solar panels use energy from the Sun to heat water.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

14
*P65067A01420*
(i) The total area of the solar panels is 15 m2.
Each 1.0 m2 of the solar panels receives 1000 J of energy per second from the Sun.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Show that the total energy transferred to the solar panels in 2 hours is about 100 MJ.
(3)

(ii) A mass of 1100 kg of cold water is in the solar panels at an initial temperature of 20 °C.
Calculate the final temperature of this water after it has been heated by the Sun
for 2 hours.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

[specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J/kg °C]

(4)

final temperature = .......................................................... °C

(iii) Give a reason why the actual final temperature of the water will be lower than
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

the calculated value.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 10 marks)

15
*P65067A01520* Turn over
6 Conventional power stations burn fuel in a furnace.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

steam out

water in

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
burning fuel

(a) The fuel can be a solid, a liquid or a gas.

Describe the motion of particles in a solid, a liquid and a gas.
(3)

solid .................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

liquid ............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

gas ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P65067A01620*
(b) When the fuel is burned, energy is transferred from the fuel to the water.
The water boils and turns into steam.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Describe how energy stored in the fuel is transferred to the water.
Refer to energy stores and transfers in your answer.
(3)

(ii) The temperature-time graph shows how the temperature of the water changes
as it is heated in the furnace at a constant rate.

Temperature

Time

Explain how the graph shows that the water changes state as it is heated.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 6 = 8 marks)

17
*P65067A01720* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)
Paper
Time 2 hours
reference
4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P

Physics
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, protractor, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box
your mind about an answer, put a line through the box
. If you change
and then mark
your new answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P67160RA
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1
*P67160RA0132*
Answer ALL questions.
1 The motion of an object can be represented using graphs.
(a) The graphs, P, Q, R and S, show different types of motion.

distance distance

P Q

time time

velocity velocity

R S

time time

The table lists some types of motion.

Place one tick () in each row of the table to show which graph represents which
type of motion.
(4)

Graph
Type of motion
P Q R S

constant acceleration

increasing acceleration

moving at constant velocity

stationary

(b) State the feature of a velocity-time graph that can be used to determine the
distance travelled by an object.
(1)

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

4
*P67160RA0432*
2 This question is about electric current.
(a) State what is meant by the term electric current.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Give the name of the particles that flow if there is an electric current in a wire.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) An electric heater contains wires that heat up when there is a current in the wires.
The electric heater has a power of 1.4 kW when connected to a mains voltage of 230 V.
(i) State the formula linking power, current and voltage.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the current in the wires.

(3)

current = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

(iii) Explain why the current in the wires causes the temperature of the wires to increase.
(2)

(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

5
*P67160RA0532* Turn over
5 A student uses a balance to measure the mass of an object.
This is the student’s method.
● adjust the balance so that it displays a reading of zero
● place the object on the balance and record the reading
The student repeats this measurement several times.

(a) What is improved by adjusting the balance to give a reading of zero before the
object is placed on it?
(1)
A accuracy of the measurement

B precision of the measurement

C reliability of the measurement

D validity of the measurement

(b) What is improved by repeating the measurement?

(1)
A accuracy of the measurement

B precision of the measurement

C reliability of the measurement

D validity of the measurement

12
*P67160RA01232*
(c) The student measures the mass of the object using six different balances.
The table shows the student’s results.

Mass in g

18.96

19.01

19.05

18.98

19.34

19.04

(i) Draw a circle around the anomalous reading in the table.

(1)
(ii) Calculate the mean mass of the object.
(3)

mean mass = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g

(iii) State what other measurement the student would need to make to determine
the density of the object.
(1)

(Total for Question 5 = 7 marks)

13
*P67160RA01332* Turn over
9 This question is about gas pressure.
(a) The diagram shows a cylinder containing propane gas.

(Source: © VitaminCo/Shutterstock)

The propane gas is stored in the cylinder at a pressure of 1.03 × 106 Pa.
(i) State the formula linking pressure, force and area.
(1)

(ii) The cylinder has an internal surface area of 1.13 m2.

Calculate the force exerted on the walls of the cylinder by the propane gas.
(3)

force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(iii) Explain why the pressure exerted by the propane gas acts equally in all directions.
(2)

20
*P67160RA02032*
10 A student uses this apparatus to investigate the stretching of a rubber band.

clamp stand rubber band

weights

This is the student’s method.

● attach the 12 cm long rubber band to a clamp stand
● hang a 1 N weight from the other end of the rubber band
● determine the extension of the rubber band
The student repeats this method, increasing the weight by 1 N each time until the
weight is 10 N.
(a) Describe how the student could determine the extension of the rubber band.
(3)

23
*P67160RA02332* Turn over
(b) The graph shows the student’s results.

10.0

7.5
Weight
in N
5.0

2.5

0.0
0 5 10 15 20

Extension in cm

(i) Explain how the graph shows that the rubber band does not obey Hooke’s Law.
(2)

24
*P67160RA02432*
(ii) The area under the curve on the graph is equal to the increase in the rubber
band’s elastic energy store.
Estimate the increase in the rubber band’s elastic energy store when the
rubber band has been extended by 20 cm.
(4)

increase = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 10 = 9 marks)

25
*P67160RA02532* Turn over
11 The diagram shows a circuit that includes a battery, an ammeter, a voltmeter and
three different resistors.

12 V

35 mA
V

19 mA
X

250 Ω Y

(a) (i) Give the voltmeter reading.

(1)

voltage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

(ii) State the formula linking voltage, current and resistance.

(1)

(iii) Calculate the resistance of resistor X.

(3)

resistance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ω

26
*P67160RA02632*
(b) (i) Give the reason why the reading on the ammeter would be 16 mA.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the resistance of resistor Y.

(4)

resistance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ω

(c) Resistor X and the voltmeter are removed from the circuit, leaving a break in this
part of the circuit.
Explain how the current in the battery changes when these components
are removed.
(2)

(Total for Question 11 = 12 marks)

27
*P67160RA02732* Turn over
12 The diagram shows a building in a hot climate.
The air temperature is 35 °C and the underground temperature is 12 °C.
The external pipe is heated by the Sun. This causes cool air to enter the house
through a tube in the ground.

Sun
external
pipe

35 °C
cool air out warm air in
opening
Y X
tube
12 °C

(a) How is energy transferred to the external pipe from the Sun?
(1)
A conduction

B convection

C evaporation
D radiation
(b) Explain why air moves upwards through the external pipe.
(3)

28
*P67160RA02832*
(c) Warm air enters the tube at point X.
Cool air leaves the tube at point Y.
Explain how the air is cooled as it travels through the tube.
(3)

(d) The external pipe is painted to increase the air flow through the building.
Explain what colour of paint would give the greatest increase in air flow.
(3)

(Total for Question 12 = 10 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 110 MARKS

29
*P67160RA02932*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes

Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• your
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box
mind about an answer, put a line through the box
. If you change
and then mark
your new answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Checkanswer
Try to every question.
• Good luck
your answers if you have time at the end.
• with your examination.
Turn over

P67162RA
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1
*P67162RA0124*
2 The photograph shows the Three Gorges Dam in China, one of the largest
hydroelectric power stations on Earth.

reservoir

river

dam

(a) State two advantages of generating electricity using hydroelectric power stations.
(2)

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Water is held in a reservoir on one side of the dam.

The water flows through turbines to a river on the other side of the dam.
The water level of the river is lower than the water level of the reservoir.
(i) State which energy store of the water decreases as the water flows from the
reservoir to the river.
(1)

(ii) How is energy transferred from the dam to homes and factories in China?
(1)
A by heating

B by radiation

C electrically

D mechanically

4
*P67162RA0424*
(c) The Three Gorges Dam has a larger maximum output power than any other
hydroelectric power station on Earth.
(i) State what is meant by the term power.
(1)

(ii) The mean energy transferred by the dam each day is 9.7 × 1014 J.
Calculate the mean output power of the dam.
(3)

mean output power = ................................................................... W

(iii) The maximum output power is 22 500 MW.

Which of these is the same as 22 500 MW?
(1)
A 22 500 000 J

B 22 500 000 J/s

C 22 500 000 000 J

D 22 500 000 000 J/s

(iv) Suggest why the Three Gorges Dam does not always operate at its maximum
output power.
(1)

(Total for Question 2 = 10 marks)

5
*P67162RA0524* Turn over
3 This question is about solids, liquids and gases.
(a) Melting is the process that occurs when a solid changes into a liquid.
Using ideas about particles, describe the process of melting.
(2)

(b) A sealed metal flask contains air at room temperature.

The flask is then heated.
The graph shows how the pressure of the air increases as its temperature increases.

160

140

Pressure
in kPa 120

100

80
250 300 350 400 450
Temperature in kelvin

6
*P67162RA0624*
(i) Explain how heating the flask increases the temperature of the air inside the flask.
(2)

(ii) Explain why the pressure of the air increases as its temperature increases.
(2)

(iii) Using the graph, determine the pressure of the air when its temperature is 400 K.
(1)

pressure = ............................................................ kPa

(iv) The air in the flask is now cooled to a temperature of 230 K.

Calculate the new pressure of the air.
(3)

pressure = ............................................................ kPa

(Total for Question 3 = 10 marks)

7
*P67162RA0724* Turn over
5 A student investigates how the support forces acting on a metre rule are affected by
the position of a mass hanger.
He uses this apparatus.

newton meter A newton meter B

metre rule

mass hanger

This is the student’s method.

● suspend a metre rule from its 10 cm and 90 cm marks using two newton meters
● place a mass hanger with a weight of 5 N at the 20 cm mark on the metre rule
● adjust the heights of the newton meters until the metre rule is horizontal
● record the readings on both newton meters
The student repeats the method, moving the mass hanger to a different position on
the metre rule each time.
(a) (i) State the independent variable in the student’s investigation.
(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State two control variables in the student’s investigation.

(2)

1 .......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 .......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Suggest how the student could improve the quality of his data.
(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
*P67162RA0924* Turn over
(b) The table shows the student’s results.

Position of mass Reading on newton Reading on newton

hanger in cm meter A in N meter B in N

20 5.1 1.4

30 4.5 2.0

40 3.9 2.6

50 3.3 3.3

60 2.6 3.9

70 2.0 4.5

80 1.4 5.1

The graph shows the results for newton meter A.

6.0

4.0
Reading on
newton meter
in N
2.0

0.0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Position of mass hanger in cm

(i) Plot the results for newton meter B.

(1)
(ii) Draw the line of best fit for newton meter B.
(1)

10
*P67162RA01024*
(iii) Describe the relationships shown by the graph.
(4)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Using ideas about moments, explain why the reading on newton meter A
decreases as the mass hanger is moved towards newton meter B.
(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 13 marks)

11
*P67162RA01124* Turn over
7 An electrostatic paint sprayer is used to paint an object.

paint
particles
uncharged
object

positively charged
nozzle

wire to
power supply

(a) The nozzle of the paint sprayer is positively charged.

Explain the advantage of using a charged nozzle.
(3)

16
*P67162RA01624*
(b) The object is an electrical conductor and is initially uncharged.
Explain why the painting process would be more effective if the object were earthed.
(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 6 marks)

17
*P67162RA01724* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Paper
Time 2 hours
reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator, protractor

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P70705A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

L:1/1/1/
*P70705A0136*
5 A driver of a car sees an obstruction in the road ahead and must stop the car.
(a) (i) State the formula linking average speed, distance travelled and time taken.
(1)

(ii) A car travels at 21 m / s.

The driver’s reaction time is 0.14 seconds.
Calculate the distance travelled by the car during the driver’s reaction time.
(2)

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
(b) The car experiences a braking force of 7600 N.
The car has a mass of 1200 kg.
(i) State the formula linking force, mass and acceleration.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the acceleration of the car.

(2)

acceleration = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s2

14
*P70705A01436*
(iii) Calculate the braking distance travelled as the speed of the car is reduced
from 21 m / s to 0 m / s.
(3)

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

(Total for Question 5 = 9 marks)

15
*P70705A01536* Turn over
6 (a) A person throws an object vertically upwards.
The speed-time graph shows how the speed of the object varies from the time it
is thrown until reaching its maximum height.

5.0

4.0

3.0
Speed
in m / s
2.0

1.0

0.0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Time in seconds

(i) Calculate the acceleration of the object.

(3)

acceleration = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s2
(ii) Calculate the distance the object travels to reach its maximum height.
(3)

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

17
*P70705A01736* Turn over
(b) A different object is dropped from rest and begins to fall.
The graph shows how the speed of this object varies with time.

2.5

2.0

C
B
1.5
Speed
in m / s
1.0

0.5

A
0.0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Time in seconds

(i) Give the name of the two forces acting on the object as it falls.
(2)

1 ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(ii) Draw arrows on the diagram to show the forces acting on the object at B.
(3)

object

18
*P70705A01836*
(iii) Explain the shape of the graph from A to C.
You should use ideas about forces to help your answer.
(4)

(Total for Question 6 = 15 marks)

19
*P70705A01936* Turn over
7 A teacher uses this circuit to investigate how the current in a circuit changes with the
temperature of a room.

1.5 V

0.91 V
6.2 mA
V

140 Ω

(a) (i) Calculate the voltage across the thermistor.

(2)

voltage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
(ii) State the formula linking voltage, current and resistance.
(1)

(iii) Calculate the resistance of the thermistor.

(3)

resistance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ω

20
*P70705A02036*
(b) The graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.

Resistance

Temperature

(i) Describe the relationship between the temperature and the resistance of
the thermistor.
(2)

(ii) Explain how the reading on the voltmeter changes when the temperature of
the room decreases.
(3)

(Total for Question 7 = 11 marks)

21
*P70705A02136* Turn over
8 Funcube-1 is a satellite that was launched into orbit around the Earth.

(Source: © Shutterstock)

(a) The rocket carrying Funcube-1 burns fuel to accelerate upwards.

As the rocket burns fuel, the energy in its chemical store reduces and the energy
in its kinetic store and gravitational store changes.
(i) State how the kinetic store of the rocket changes as the rocket burns fuel.
(1)

(ii) State how the gravitational store of the rocket changes as the rocket
burns fuel.
(1)

(b) The rocket engine stops burning fuel.

The rocket continues to go further away from the surface of the Earth.
The table gives some statements about the rocket’s energy stores.
Add ticks () to the table to show which two statements are correct.
(2)

Statement Correct ()

gravitational store increases

gravitational store stays the same

gravitational store decreases

kinetic store increases

kinetic store stays the same

kinetic store decreases

23
*P70705A02336* Turn over
(d) Funcube-1 spins and is heated by the Sun.
The diagram shows two coloured metal bars attached to a face of Funcube-1.
The surface of one metal bar is dull and black.
The surface of the other metal bar is shiny and white.

direction
not to scale
of spin

Funcube-1
Sun

Temperature probes measure the temperature of each metal bar.

Use ideas about thermal energy transfer to explain how the temperature of each
metal bar changes as Funcube-1 spins.
(4)

(Total for Question 8 = 11 marks)

25
*P70705A02536* Turn over
9 A student investigates how the extension of a spring varies when the mass attached
to the spring is changed.
(a) The diagram shows most of the equipment the student uses in the investigation.

clamp

spring

clamp
stand
mass

Describe a method the student could use for the investigation.

Your description should include the measurements taken and how the student
could obtain accurate results.
(5)

27
*P70705A02736* Turn over
(b) The student calculates the force each mass applies to the spring.
The table shows the student’s results.

Force in N Extension in cm

0.0 0.0

1.0 2.5

2.0 5.0

3.0 9.8

4.0 10.0

5.0 12.5

6.0 15.5

7.0 19.5

(i) Plot the student’s results.

(3)
(ii) Draw a circle around the anomalous point.
(1)
(iii) Draw a line of best fit.
(1)

28
*P70705A02836*
(iv) Explain whether the spring obeys Hooke’s Law.
(3)

(Total for Question 9 = 13 marks)

29
*P70705A02936* Turn over
12 This question is about an electric fan.
(a) A battery supplies a voltage of 12 V and a current of 0.25 A to the fan.
The fan is switched on for 12 seconds and the fan gains 25 J in its kinetic
energy store.
Calculate the efficiency of this energy transfer.
(4)

efficiency = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . %
(b) The diagram shows part of the electric motor inside the fan.

permanent axle
magnet
X Y

N S
W Z
coil

+ −

34
*P70705A03436*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Paper
Time 2 hours
reference 4PH1/1PR 4SD0/1PR

Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1PR
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, protractor, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P70712A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

L:1/1/1/
*P70712A0132*
4 This question is about scalar quantities and vector quantities.
(a) Give a similarity and a difference for scalar quantities and vector quantities.
(2)
similarity

difference

(b) The box gives some physical quantities.

Draw a circle around each physical quantity that is a scalar.
(3)

acceleration charge force power

temperature velocity weight

(c) The diagram shows four forces acting on an object.

Calculate the size and direction of the resultant force.
(2)

8N 2N

resultant force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 7 marks)

10
*P70712A01032*
5 The chart shows the efficiencies of different methods of generating electricity.

hydroelectric (large)

hydroelectric (small)

oil

nuclear fission

wind turbine

geothermal

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Electricity generation efficiencies (%)

(a) The chart shows that the geothermal power station has an efficiency of 15%.
Explain what is meant by an efficiency of 15%.
(2)

(b) A small hydroelectric power station has a useful energy output of 6.0 kJ.
Calculate the total energy input for this power station using information from
the chart.
(4)

total energy input = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kJ

12
*P70712A01232*
(c) (i) Name a fuel used in the reactor of a nuclear power station.
(1)

(ii) These sentences describe the process of nuclear fission.

Complete these sentences by writing a suitable word in each blank space.
(5)

A nucleus absorbs a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................... .

The nucleus formed splits because it is ............................................................................................. .

The nucleus splits into two smaller nuclei called ............................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nuclei and two or three . . . .......................................................................................... .

The energy released is transferred into the ............................................................................................ .

energy store of the fission products.

(Total for Question 5 = 12 marks)

13
*P70712A01332* Turn over
9 The diagram shows a circuit containing a cell, two switches and two resistors,
R1 and R2 .

switch 1
R1

switch 2
R2

(a) A light emitting diode (LED) is represented using the symbol

Draw a LED on the circuit diagram that will indicate when there is a current in
resistor R1 .
(2)
(b) Both switches in the circuit are now closed.
(i) Draw an ammeter on the circuit diagram that will measure the current in
the cell.
(1)
(ii) The voltage across the cell is 4.5 V.
Explain how the voltage across R2 compares with the voltage across the cell.
(2)

20
*P70712A02032*
(c) Switch 1 is now opened whilst switch 2 remains closed.
(i) State the formula linking energy transferred, charge and voltage.
(1)

(ii) The voltage across the cell stays constant at 4.5 V.

Calculate the charge transferred through the cell when the cell transfers
4.1 J of energy.
(3)

charge transferred = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C

(iii) A student investigates how the current in resistor R2 varies with the voltage
across it.
Describe how the circuit could be modified for the student to do
this investigation.
(3)

(Total for Question 9 = 12 marks)

21
*P70712A02132* Turn over
10 A student does an experiment to determine the acceleration due to gravity, g.
The diagram shows the apparatus used.

steel ball

light gate A

clamp stand

transparent tube

light gate B

This is the student’s method.

• connect both light gates to a data logger
• drop a steel ball from rest at the top of the transparent tube
• record the speed of the ball at each light gate
• record the time taken for the ball to fall from light gate A to light gate B

22
*P70712A02232*
(a) The box shows the data recorded by the data logger.

speed at A = 1.45 m/s

speed at B = 4.20 m/s
time from A to B = 0.286 s

(i) Show that the acceleration of the steel ball is approximately 9.6 m/s2 .
(2)

acceleration = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

(ii) Explain why the student’s value for the acceleration of the steel ball is lower
than the accepted value for the acceleration due to gravity, g.
(2)

(iii) Calculate the distance between the light gates.

(3)

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

23
*P70712A02332* Turn over
(b) The student changes the distance between the light gates by varying the position
of light gate B.
The student measures the time taken for the steel ball to fall from light gate A to
light gate B when the light gates are different distances apart.
The table shows the student’s results.

Distance between
Time taken
light gates
in s
in m

0.10 0.058

0.20 0.103

0.30 0.141

0.40 0.175

0.50 0.205

0.60 0.233

0.70 0.260

(i) Plot a graph of the student’s results on the grid.

(2)
(ii) Draw the curve of best fit.
(1)

Distance between
light gates
in m

Time taken in s

24
*P70712A02432*
(iii) Explain how the graph shows that the steel ball is accelerating as it falls.
(3)

(Total for Question 10 = 13 marks)

25
*P70712A02532* Turn over
12 The photograph shows a recyclable box designed for transporting cold food.

layered cardboard lid

layered cardboard walls

The box has these design features

• thick walls made from several layers of cardboard with air trapped between
the layers
• a thick lid made from layers of cardboard
Cold food and ice packs are placed in the box.
(a) Give a reason why there is a net transfer of energy from the outside of the box to
the inside of the box during transportation in a hot country.
(1)

(b) Explain how the box is designed to reduce energy transfer by conduction.
(2)

28
*P70712A02832*
(c) Explain how the box is designed to reduce energy transfer by convection.
(2)

(d) A student suggests that painting the inner surfaces of the box a different colour
would help to reduce the rate of energy transfer to the cold food.
Explain which colour the inner surfaces of the box should be painted.
(2)

(Total for Question 12 = 7 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 110 MARKS

29
*P70712A02932*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P70707A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

L:1/1/1/
*P70707A0124*
Answer ALL questions.

Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .

1 (a) Which of these is a device used to measure force?

(1)
A newton meter

B ruler

C thermometer

D voltmeter

(b) Airbags are safety devices used in cars to protect the driver if there is a crash.
(i) State the formula linking momentum, mass and velocity.
(1)

(ii) A person inside a car has a mass of 72 kg and a velocity of 13 m/s.

Show that the momentum of the person is about 900 kg m/s.
(1)

(iii) The person experiences a crash and comes to rest in 0.29 s.

Calculate the force on the person.
(2)

force = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

4
*P70707A0424*
(iv) Which statement explains how airbags protect the driver?
(1)
A increase the force acting on the driver

B increase the time taken for the driver to stop

C increase the kinetic energy store of the driver

D increase the momentum of the driver

(Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

5
*P70707A0524* Turn over
2 (a) Describe the arrangement and motion of particles in a solid.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(3)

(b) A solid changes state by melting at a certain temperature.

For phosphorus, this change of state occurs at 44 °C.
Sketch how the temperature of a sample of phosphorus changes when it is
heated at a constant rate from –40 °C to 80 °C.
(3)

Temperature
20
in °C

0 Time

–20

–40

(Total for Question 2 = 6 marks)

6
*P70707A0624*
5 The diagram shows a ball at the bottom of a ramp. The ball moves up the ramp with
an initial speed v.

v
29 cm

ball

(a) State the formula linking gravitational potential energy (GPE), mass, gravitational
field strength (g) and height.
(1)

(b) The ball has a mass of 14 g.

Show that when the ball reaches a height of 29 cm above the bottom of the ramp,
the GPE gained by the ball is about 4 × 10−2 J.
(3)

(c) At the bottom of the ramp, the 14 g ball has a kinetic energy (KE) of 5.1 × 10−2 J.
Calculate the speed of the ball at the bottom of the ramp.
(3)

speed = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

12
*P70707A01224*
(d) The ball is stationary when it reaches the top of the ramp. There is a difference
between the KE of the ball at the bottom of the ramp and the GPE of the ball at a
height of 29 cm above the bottom of the ramp.
Explain why the work done by friction between the ball and the ramp is equal to
this difference.
(2)

(Total for Question 5 = 9 marks)

13
*P70707A01324* Turn over
7 The photographs show two large-scale electrical production methods
• a hydroelectric power (HEP) station
• a wind farm

(Source: © Bryan Busovicki/Shutterstock) (Source: © Tom Buysse/Shutterstock)

Hydroelectric power station Wind farm

(a) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using hydroelectric power stations
compared with wind farms for large-scale electricity production.
(4)

18
*P70707A01824*
(b) Describe the energy transfers that are involved in generating electricity in a
hydroelectric power station.
(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 7 marks)

19
*P70707A01924* Turn over
9 A student uses a small iron nail and a beaker of water to estimate the temperature
of a flame. The diagram shows some of the equipment used.

nail
flame

beaker
heatproof mat water

This is the student’s method

• place a thermometer into the beaker of water
• record the temperature of the water
• heat the nail in the flame for a long period of time
• quickly move the nail into the beaker of water
• record the highest temperature of the water
(a) State a safety precaution the student should take.
(1)

22
*P70707A02224*
(b) While in the water, the thermal energy store of the nail decreases and the thermal
energy store of the water increases until their temperatures are the same.
The energy lost from the nail is equal to the energy gained by the water.
The table shows the student’s results.

Mass of water in g 138

Specific heat capacity of water in J/kg °C 4200

Temperature change of water in °C 5.0

Mass of nail in g 4.8

Specific heat capacity of iron in J/kg °C 450

(i) Show that the energy gained by the water is approximately 3000 J.
(2)

(ii) Calculate the temperature change of the nail.

(3)

Temperature change = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(iii) Give a reason why the calculated temperature change of the nail is lower than
the actual temperature change.
(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 9 = 7 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

23
*P70707A02324*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P70714A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

L:1/1/1/1/
*P70714A0124*
Answer ALL questions.

Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .

1 (a) The table lists four methods of generating electricity and four energy stores.

Energy store

Method of generating Gravitational

Thermal Kinetic Chemical
electricity potential

geothermal power station

hydroelectric power station

petrol generator

wind turbine

The energy store of the initial energy resource decreases when electricity is
being generated.
(i) Complete the table by placing one tick () in each row to show which energy
store decreases.
(4)
(ii) State which method of generating electricity in the table does not use a
renewable energy resource.
(1)

(b) State two disadvantages of using wind turbines to generate electricity.

(2)

1 ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

3
*P70714A0324* Turn over
2 Cricket is a sport played with bats and balls.

(a) (i) A cricket player hits a ball with a bat. Before the ball is hit, it is moving to the
left with a momentum of 4.2 kg m/s.
The bat is in contact with the ball for 0.012 s.
After the ball is hit, it moves to the right with a momentum of 6.7 kg m/s.
Calculate the mean force the bat exerts on the ball and state the direction of
the force.
(3)

mean force = ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State the magnitude and direction of the mean force the ball exerts on
the bat.
(1)

magnitude of mean force = ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction of force .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
*P70714A0424*
(b) The cricket player wears padded protective equipment.
This protective equipment reduces the risk of injury to the player if they are struck
by the cricket ball.
Explain how this protective equipment reduces the risk of injury to the player.
Use ideas about momentum in your answer.
(3)

(Total for Question 2 = 7 marks)

5
*P70714A0524* Turn over
3 Two students do an experiment to measure the speed of sound in air.

They use two blocks of wood that make a loud noise when hit together.

They do their experiment outside in a wide-open space.

(a) Describe how the students should use their equipment to measure the speed of
sound in air.

You may draw a diagram to support your answer.

(5)

6
*P70714A0624*
(b) The table shows the students’ results.

Time in s
Distance in m
Trial 1 Trial 2 Trial 3 Mean

50 0.46 0.35 0.49 0.43

100 0.50 0.38 0.62 0.50

150 0.42 0.64 0.57 0.54

200 0.68 0.59 0.60 0.62

250 0.58 0.79 0.75 0.71

300 0.90 0.86 0.84

(i) Calculate the mean time for the last row in the table.
(2)

mean time = .............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(ii) The students think that some of their time readings are anomalous.
State how the students should deal with these anomalous readings.
(1)

(iii) Explain which distance in the table is likely to give the most accurate value for
the speed of sound in air.
(2)

(Total for Question 3 = 10 marks)

7
*P70714A0724* Turn over
4 A racing car uses an engine and an electric motor to power its wheels.

(Source: Jens Mommens/Shutterstock)

(a) The electric motor can only operate at maximum power for part of each lap of
the race.
The electric motor has a maximum power output of 1.2 × 105 W.
The electric motor transfers 4.0 × 106 J of energy when it operates at
maximum power.
Calculate the amount of time the electric motor can operate at maximum power.
(3)

time = .............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

8
*P70714A0824*
(b) The diagram shows a simplified view of a direct current (d.c.) electric motor.

N S

commutator

brush

brush
+
–

(i) State what is meant by the term direct current.

(1)

(ii) Explain the purpose of the brushes and the commutator in the d.c. motor.
(3)

9
*P70714A0924* Turn over
(c) The electric motor in the racing car can also be used as a generator to charge a
battery pack. It is known as a motor generator unit (MGU).
The rotating wheels of the car cause the magnets in the MGU to spin near a coil
of wire.
This induces a current in the coil when the coil is connected to the battery pack.
(i) Name the energy store of the battery pack that increases when the
battery pack is being charged.
(1)

(ii) Explain why the kinetic energy store of the car must decrease when the MGU
charges the battery pack.
(3)

(Total for Question 4 = 11 marks)

10
*P70714A01024*
7 A student investigates the rate of cooling of water in a beaker.

The student pours boiling water into a beaker and monitors the temperature of the
water for a period of time.
The graph shows the student’s results.

Temperature
in °C 70

50
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Time in s

16
*P70714A01624*
(a) The rate of cooling is represented by the gradient of the graph and is measured
in °C/s.
By drawing a tangent to the curve, determine the rate of cooling of the water
at 70 °C.
(4)

rate of cooling = ....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C/s

(b) The student repeats the investigation with the same beaker wrapped in
woollen insulation.

Sketch another line on the graph to show the expected results when the beaker is
wrapped in woollen insulation.
Assume that the starting temperature of the water is 82 °C.
(2)

(Total for Question 7 = 6 marks)

17
*P70714A01724* Turn over
8 Diagram 1 shows a machine used for demonstrating electrostatics.

+ +
+ +
+ +
metal dome
+ +

+ +

rubber belt

spindle handle

Diagram 1

(a) When the handle is turned, the dome becomes positively charged.
(i) In terms of electron movement, give a reason why the metal dome becomes
positively charged.
(1)

18
*P70714A01824*
(ii) When the handle is turned for 15 s the dome gains 0.50 J of energy in its
electrostatic store as it becomes charged.
The voltage between the dome and the earth is 120 kV.
Calculate the mean charging current during this time.
(3)

mean charging current = ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

19
*P70714A01924* Turn over
(b) The metal dome is discharged.
A thin metal case is then placed on top of the metal dome, as shown in Diagram 2.

thin metal case

metal dome

Diagram 2

(i) When the handle is turned, the thin metal case moves upwards away from
the dome.
Explain why the thin metal case starts to move upwards.
(3)

20
*P70714A02024*
(ii) Explain why the metal case reaches a maximum height above the
metal dome.
(4)

(Total for Question 8 = 11 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

21
*P70714A02124*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Paper
Time 2 hours
reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P70951A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

Q:1/1/1/1/1/
*P70951A0132*
6 The diagram shows a child on a zip-line ride.
During the ride the child slides along a metal wire with the velocity in the direction
shown in the diagram.

tension

velocity

The diagram also shows the tension force acting on the safety harness the child
is wearing.
(a) Force and velocity are examples of vector quantities.
State what is meant by the term vector quantity.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Draw labelled arrows on the diagram to show two other forces that act on
the child.
(4)

(Total for Question 6 = 5 marks)

15
*P70951A01532* Turn over
7 (a) State what is meant by the term electric current.
(1)

(b) Diagram 1 shows an electric circuit used to test a fuse.

d.c. power supply

+ −

fuse LED

Diagram 1

(i) Give a reason why an LED is included in the circuit.

(1)

(ii) Add another component to the circuit in diagram 1 to measure the current in
the fuse.
(1)

16
*P70951A01632*
(c) Diagram 2 shows a different electric circuit containing three different lamps.

+ −

0.6 A I2
lamp 1

0.2 A

lamp 2

lamp 3

0.3 A

Diagram 2

(i) Calculate the current I1 .

(1)

I1 = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
(ii) State the current I2 .
(1)

I2 = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
(iii) Explain which lamp is the brightest.
(3)

(Total for Question 7 = 8 marks)

17
*P70951A01732* Turn over
8 The photograph shows a toy car. When the toy car is pulled backwards, energy is
stored in the elastic store as the rubber band is twisted.

metal can

rubber band

(Source: Mama Belle and the kids/Shutterstock)

When the car is released, some of the energy from the elastic store is transferred to
the kinetic store of the car.
The remaining energy is transferred into the thermal store of the surroundings.
(a) State what is meant by the principle of conservation of energy.
(1)

(b) The car is pulled backwards so that there is 165 J of energy in its elastic store.
When the car is released, this energy is transferred to the car’s kinetic energy store
with an efficiency of 15 %.
(i) State the formula linking efficiency, useful energy output and
total energy output.
(1)

18
*P70951A01832*
(ii) Calculate the energy transferred into the thermal store of the surroundings.
(4)

energy transferred to thermal store = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(iii) Draw a labelled Sankey diagram for this energy transfer.
(3)

19
*P70951A01932* Turn over
(c) The car is pulled backwards again.
When released, 45 J of energy transfers into the car’s kinetic store.
The car travels a distance of 7.5 m during this energy transfer.
(i) State the useful work done on the car.
(1)

work done = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(ii) Calculate the mean accelerating force acting on the car.
(3)

accelerating force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(Total for Question 8 = 13 marks)

20
*P70951A02032*
9 (a) Diagram 1 shows a plastic bottle containing water.

hole in cap

air
water

Diagram 1

(i) State the formula linking pressure difference, height, density and
gravitational field strength, g.
(1)

(ii) The pressure difference between the surface of the water and the water at the
bottom of the bottle is 2300 Pa.
Calculate the depth of water in the bottle.
Give your answer in cm.
[density of water = 1000 kg / m3]
(3)

depth = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

21
*P70951A02132* Turn over
(b) Three holes are made in the bottle at positions A, B and C.
Diagram 2 shows the path of the water leaving the bottle from hole B.

hole in cap

air
water
A

C B

Diagram 2

(i) Draw a line on diagram 2 to show the path of the water leaving the bottle
from hole A.
(1)
(ii) Explain the path of the water leaving the bottle from hole A.
(2)

22
*P70951A02232*
(iii) Hole C is at the same depth in the bottle as hole B but on the opposite side of
the bottle.
Explain the shape of the path of the water leaving the bottle from hole C.
(3)

(iv) Suggest why there is a hole in the cap of the bottle.

(1)

(Total for Question 9 = 11 marks)

23
*P70951A02332* Turn over
10 The photograph shows a vertical drop ride at an amusement park.

passenger

car
vertical shaft

(Source: Kenneth Sponsler/Shutterstock)

The car is pulled to the top of a vertical shaft and then released from rest.
The car then falls freely because of the force of gravity.
(a) Calculate the speed of the car when it has fallen 18 m.
(3)

speed = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

24
*P70951A02432*
(b) (i) State the formula linking kinetic energy, mass and speed.
(1)

(ii) The mass of the car and its passengers is 2.1 tonnes.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the car when it has fallen 18 m.
[1 tonne = 1000 kg]
(2)

kinetic energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(c) The actual speed of the car when it has fallen 18 m is lower than the value
calculated in (a).
Describe the energy transfers occurring from immediately before the car was
released to when the car has fallen 18 m.
Refer to stores and transfers in your answer.
(4)

(Total for Question 10 = 10 marks)

25
*P70951A02532* Turn over
11 A steel ball is fired from a launcher on an adjustable table.
A student investigates how the range of the steel ball varies with the height of
the table.

launcher
steel ball

path of steel ball

table height

floor

range

26
*P70951A02632*
(a) Describe a method for the student’s investigation.
Your answer should include details of
• the variables in the investigation
• how the investigation will be valid (a fair test)
• how the range will be measured accurately
(6)

27
*P70951A02732* Turn over
(b) The graph shows the student’s results.

2.00

1.50

Range
1.00
in m

0.50

0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0
Table height in m

(i) Draw the curve of best fit.

(1)
(ii) Estimate what the height of the table would be when the range of the
projectile is 0.60 m.
(1)

height = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
(iii) Justify why the student has plotted a line graph rather than a bar chart.
(1)

28
*P70951A02832*
(iv) The range of the projectile is related to the table height by this formula

table height
range = launch speed ×
5

Using data from the graph, show that the launch speed of the projectile is
approximately 3 m / s.
(4)

launch speed = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

(Total for Question 11 = 13 marks)

29
*P70951A02932* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Paper
Time 2 hours
reference 4PH1/1PR 4SD0/1PR

Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1PR
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, protractor, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P70952A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

Q:1/1/1/1/
*P70952A0128*
3 The diagram shows an electric circuit containing component X and a lamp connected
in series.

0.0018 A

(a) (i) Add another component to the diagram to measure the voltage of
component X.
(1)

(ii) Give the name of component X.

(1)

5
*P70952A0528* Turn over
(b) The graph shows how the resistance of component X changes with light intensity.

5000

4000

3000
Resistance
in Ω
2000

1000

0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
Light intensity in arbitrary units

(i) Use the graph to determine the resistance of component X when the light
intensity is 4.0 arbitrary units.
(2)

resistance = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ω

(ii) The current in the circuit is 0.0018 A.

Calculate the voltage across component X at a light intensity of
4.0 arbitrary units.
(3)

voltage = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

6
*P70952A0628*
(iii) Explain what happens to the brightness of the lamp when component X is
covered with a dark sheet of paper.
(2)

(Total for Question 3 = 9 marks)

7
*P70952A0728* Turn over
4 Diagram 1 shows an ice cube floating at rest in a beaker of water.

ice
cube

water

Diagram 1

(a) State the value of the resultant force on the ice cube.
(1)

resultant force = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(b) Diagram 2 shows the ice cube pushed down into the water by force X.
The ice cube is at rest in this new position.

force X

ice
cube

water

Diagram 2

(i) State the formula linking pressure difference, height, density and
gravitational field strength.
(1)

8
*P70952A0828*
(ii) The bottom of the ice cube is 0.041 m below the surface of the water.
The density of water is 1000 kg/m3.
Show that the pressure difference between the bottom of the ice cube and
the surface of the water is about 400 Pa.
(2)

(iii) State the formula linking pressure, force and area.

(1)

(iv) The area of the base of the ice cube is 0.0017 m2.
Calculate the upward force on the bottom of the cube from the water due to
the pressure difference.
(2)

upward force = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(v) Explain why the ice cube will accelerate upwards when force X is removed.
(2)

(Total for Question 4 = 9 marks)

9
*P70952A0928* Turn over
6 Diagram 1 shows a simple loudspeaker.

tube
magnet
N

paper cone
N

coil on tube

Diagram 1

(4)

12
*P70952A01228*
(b) Diagram 2 shows two loudspeakers connected in series with a variable resistor.
The variable resistor is set to 5.0 Ω.

1.5 V 5.0 Ω

0.15 A

Diagram 2

(i) The total voltage across the two loudspeakers is 0.75 V and the current in the
circuit is 0.15 A.
Show that the total power of the two loudspeakers is about 0.1 W.
[power = current × voltage]
(2)

13
*P70952A01328* Turn over
(ii) A student varies the resistance of the variable resistor.
The table shows the power of the loudspeakers for different resistance values
of the variable resistor.

Resistance of variable resistor in Ω Power of loudspeakers in W

0.0 0.000

2.5 0.100

5.0 0.113

7.5 0.108

10.0 0.100

12.5 0.092

15.0 0.084

Plot the student’s results on the grid.

(3)
(iii) Draw a curve of best fit.
(2)

14
*P70952A01428*
(c) Diagram 3 shows the loudspeakers connected in series to a cell.
Diagram 4 shows the loudspeakers connected in parallel to the same cell.

1.5 V 1.5 V

0.30 A 1.2 A

Diagram 3 Diagram 4

Comment on how the total resistance of the loudspeakers in diagram 3 compares

with the total resistance of the loudspeakers in diagram 4.
(4)

(Total for Question 6 = 15 marks)

15
*P70952A01528* Turn over
8 Hailstones are small pieces of ice that sometimes fall to the ground during storms.
(a) (i) Describe how to determine the density of a hailstone.
Assume that hailstones are spherical.
(4)

(ii) The mean volume of a hailstone is 1.1 cm3.

The mean mass of a hailstone is 0.94 g.
Calculate the mean density of a hailstone.
Give the unit.
(3)

density = .............................................................. unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P70952A01828*
(b) Hailstones can be lifted to the top of clouds.
The diagram shows the movement of some hailstones in a cloud.

cloud

movement
of hailstones

warm ground

Suggest how hailstones are lifted to the top of the cloud by convection.
(2)

(Total for Question 8 = 9 marks)

19
*P70952A01928* Turn over
9 The diagram shows an empty metal container that has a hole in the top.

container

(a) Describe how the air molecules in the container exert a pressure on its inner walls.
(3)

(b) The container is heated for a long time.

Explain what happens to the number of air molecules in the container.
(2)

20
*P70952A02028*
(c) A lid is placed on the hot container.
The lid seals the hole and the container is allowed to cool.
As the container cools, it collapses.

container collapsed
with lid container

Explain why the container collapses.

(2)

(Total for Question 9 = 7 marks)

21
*P70952A02128* Turn over
12 This question is about a parachutist.
(a) A parachutist leaves a helicopter that is hovering above the ground.
The parachutist is initially at rest and falls vertically downwards.
Calculate the speed of the parachutist after they have fallen through a distance
of 1300 m.
Ignore the effect of air resistance.
(4)

speed = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(b) When the parachutist is much nearer to the ground, they open their parachute.
The parachutist slows down.

(i) Explain the change in speed of the parachutist.

Use ideas about forces in your answer.
(3)

26
*P70952A02628*
(ii) It is observed that from when the parachute opens to just before the
parachutist touches the ground, the GPE store and the KE store of
the parachutist both decrease, yet energy is still conserved.
Justify these observations.
(3)

(Total for Question 12 = 10 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 110 MARKS

27
*P70952A02728*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P70953A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

Q:1/1/1/
*P70953A0124*
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .

1 A student uses a watt-meter to measure the power of

electrically-operated appliances.

(a) State what is meant by the term power.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
*P70953A0424*
(b) The student measures the mean power output (in watts) for six
different appliances.
Diagram 1 shows their results.

Toaster = 1068 W
Kettle = 2025 W
Laptop = 47 W
Electric drill = 713 W
Television = 59 W
Hair dryer = 1511 W

Diagram 1

Draw a results table for the student’s results.

(2)

5
*P70953A0524* Turn over
(c) The student measures the power output for a different appliance.
Diagram 2 shows their raw data.

199 W 202 W 201 W

213 W 200 W 201 W

Diagram 2

(i) The student identifies an anomalous result in their data.

Draw a circle around the anomalous result.
(1)
(ii) Calculate the mean power output for this appliance.
Give your answer to three significant figures.
(3)

mean power output = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

6
*P70953A0624*
2 This question is about momentum.
(a) Which of these is the correct unit for momentum?
(1)
A kg / m / s

B kg2 m / s

C kg m / s2

D kg m / s

(b) The diagram shows an object before and after an explosion.

The object breaks into two parts, P and Q.
The parts move away from each other in opposite directions.

object stationary v P Q 3.7 m / s

4.8 kg 2.9 kg 1.9 kg

Before After

(i) State what is meant by the principle of conservation of momentum.

(1)

(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the velocity of part P after the explosion.
(3)

velocity = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

8
*P70953A0824*
(c) A child drops an egg from a height of 10 cm and the egg lands on the floor.
Explain why the egg is less likely to break if the floor is covered with a thick carpet
than if the floor were covered in hard tiles.
(3)

(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

9
*P70953A0924* Turn over
7 This question is about specific heat capacity.
(a) State what is meant by the term specific heat capacity.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A student uses this method to measure the specific heat capacity of water.
• place an aluminium block of known mass in an oven at a temperature
of 220 °C
• place water of known mass in a container at a temperature of 20 °C
• leave the aluminium block in the oven for 10 minutes
• remove the aluminium block from the oven and place the block in the water
• measure the maximum temperature of the water after it has been heated by
the aluminium block
The student uses their data to calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
Give two ways that they could improve their method to increase the accuracy of
their value of specific heat capacity.
(2)

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
*P70953A01924* Turn over
(c) The box shows the student’s data.

Mass of aluminium block = 1.6 kg

Mass of water = 2.3 kg
Initial temperature of water = 20 °C
Maximum temperature of water = 38 °C

(i) When the water reaches its maximum temperature, the water and
aluminium block are in thermal equilibrium.
State the temperature of the aluminium block as it reaches thermal
equilibrium with the water.
(1)

temperature of aluminium = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(ii) Calculate the temperature change of the water when it has been heated to its
maximum temperature.
(1)

temperature change of water = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(iii) The water gains 190 000 J of energy in its thermal store as it is heated to its
maximum temperature.
Calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
(3)

specific heat capacity of water = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J / kg °C

20
*P70953A02024*
(d) After finishing the experiment, the student removes the aluminium block and
places the container of water into a freezer.
The water loses energy at a constant rate and cools from 38 °C to –20 °C.
The water freezes and turns into ice at 0 °C.
Ice has a lower specific heat capacity than water.
Use the axes to sketch a temperature-time graph from when the water is placed
in the freezer until it reaches its lowest temperature.
No calculations are required.
(4)

20
Temperature
in °C
10

0
Time

−10

−20

(Total for Question 7 = 13 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

21
*P70953A02124*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P70954A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

Q:1/1/1/1/
*P70954A0124*
3 The SPS is a particle accelerator in Geneva.
The SPS can accelerate sulfur particles to speeds almost as fast as the speed of light.
(a) Neutral sulfur particles can become positively charged sulfur particles.
Describe the difference between a neutral sulfur particle and a positively charged
sulfur particle.
(2)

(b) Diagram 1 shows a section of the SPS.

positive negative
plate plate

Diagram 1

Positively charged sulfur particles are introduced at point P and accelerate to

the right.
Explain why the positively charged sulfur particles accelerate.
(2)

8
*P70954A0824*
4 A student heats a sample of water.
The student measures the temperature of the sample of water during heating.
(a) The sample of water has a mass of 0.45 kg.
Calculate the energy required to increase the temperature of the water
from 16 °C to 100 °C.
[specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J / kg °C]
(3)

energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
(b) The diagram shows the temperature-time graph for the sample of water.

200

160

120
Temperature
in °C
80

0
0 2 4 6 8 10

Time in minutes

10
*P70954A01024*
(i) Use the graph to determine the time taken from when the water started to
boil to when the water stopped boiling.
(1)

time taken = ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . minutes

(ii) The heater used to heat the water has a power rating of 2200 W.
Calculate the energy required to boil all of the water.
(3)

energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
(c) Give a reason why the liquid water should be stirred during the heating.
(1)

(d) When water boils, the liquid water becomes a gas called steam.
Describe the changes in arrangement and motion of the molecules in liquid water
and the molecules in steam.
(4)

(Total for Question 4 = 12 marks)

11
*P70954A01124* Turn over
7 Diagram 1 shows a gate fitted with a spring mechanism.
The spring mechanism shuts the gate automatically.

gate

spring
mechanism

Diagram 1

(a) The graph shows some data from an investigation into how the extension of the
spring changes with an increasing force.

30
Extension
in cm
20

0
0 100 200 300 400 500

Force in N

Describe the relationship shown by the graph.

(2)

20
*P70954A02024*
(b) Diagram 2 shows the gate viewed from above.

F
320 cm
pivot 84 cm

spring gate
mechanism
480 N

Diagram 2

The force the spring exerts on the gate is 480 N.

Show that the moment of the force the spring exerts on the gate is about 400 Nm.
(2)

force F = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
(d) The spring is removed for testing.
Explain what will happen to the spring if the force applied to extend the spring is
too large.
(2)

(Total for Question 7 = 10 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

21
*P70954A02124*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Paper
Time 2 hours
reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator, protractor

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• Fill in theis boxes
If pencil used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• centre number andat candidate
the top of this page with your name,
number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may questions
Answer the in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P71896A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.

J:1/1/1/
*P71896A0132*
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .
1 A material is stretched by applying an increasing load. The material shows elastic
behaviour as it is stretched.
(a) Describe what is meant by elastic behaviour.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The material obeys Hooke’s law.

Sketch a graph for this material to show that it obeys Hooke’s law as it is stretched.
You should label both axes with appropriate physical quantities.
(3)

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

3
*P71896A0332* Turn over
3 A winch is used to pull a truck along a horizontal road.
The winch is connected to the truck by a thick rope.

truck
rope
winch

(Source: © A. Bizgaimer/Shutterstock)

(a) The winch does 41 kJ of useful work on the truck when the truck is pulled a
horizontal distance of 15 m.
(i) State the formula linking work done, force and distance moved in the
direction of the force.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the force that the rope exerts on the truck.
(3)

force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

6
*P71896A0632*
(b) The winch includes a small engine. The engine burns petrol to power the motor in
the winch.
The winch transfers energy mechanically to the truck.
(i) The winch has an efficiency of 25% when pulling the truck.
Draw a Sankey diagram for this energy transfer.
(3)

(ii) The winch can also be used to pull the truck uphill at a constant speed.
The table gives some energy stores.
Add one tick (ü) to each row to show what happens to the energy in each
store as the truck is pulled uphill.
(4)

Stays the
Energy store Decreases Increases
same

chemical store of petrol in winch

gravitational store of truck

kinetic store of truck

thermal store of surroundings

(Total for Question 3 = 11 marks)

7
*P71896A0732* Turn over
5 The graph shows how the thinking distance and the braking distance vary with the
speed of a car.

braking
distance
50

40
Distance
in m
30

20
thinking
distance

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Speed in m / s

(a) Which of these does not affect thinking distance?

(1)
A alcohol consumed by the driver

B condition of the road

C speed of the car

D tiredness of the driver

(b) Which of these would increase the braking distance of the car?
(1)
A faster reaction time of driver

B ice on the road

C more powerful brakes

D tyres with more grip

12
*P71896A01232*
(c) Determine the stopping distance of the car when the speed of the car is 20 m / s.
(3)

stopping distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

(d) (i) State the formula linking average speed, distance moved and time taken.
(1)

(ii) Determine the reaction time of the driver of the car.

(3)

reaction time = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(e) Calculate the mean braking acceleration of the car as it brakes to a stop from an
initial speed of 30 m / s.
(4)

acceleration = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s2

(Total for Question 5 = 13 marks)

13
*P71896A01332* Turn over
7 A student uses the circuit shown in diagram 1 to investigate how the current changes
with voltage for a filament lamp.

A V

component Y

Diagram 1

(a) (i) Give the name of component Y.

(1)

(ii) Give a reason why component Y is included in the circuit.

(1)

17
*P71896A01732* Turn over
(b) The graph shows some of the student’s results.

0.6
Current
in A
0.4

0.2

–12 –8 –4 0 4 8 12
Voltage
in V
–0.2

–0.4

–0.6

18
*P71896A01832*
(i) State the formula linking charge, current and time.
(1)

(ii) Determine the current in the lamp when the voltage across the lamp is 10 V.
(1)

current = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
(iii) Calculate the charge transferred through the lamp in 30 s when the voltage
across the lamp is 10 V.
Give the unit.
(3)

charge = .............................................................. unit ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iv) Calculate the time for the lamp to transfer 250 J of energy when the voltage
across the lamp is 10 V.
(3)

time = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s
(v) The student disconnects the cell and reconnects it with its terminals reversed.
Complete the graph to show how the current in the lamp varies with voltage
across the lamp when the cell is connected with its terminals reversed.
(2)

19
*P71896A01932* Turn over
(c) The student replaces the filament lamp with a light emitting diode (LED) and
replaces the cell with an alternating current (a.c.) power supply, as shown in
diagram 2.
The student also removes the ammeter and voltmeter from the circuit.

component Y

Diagram 2

Explain why the LED flashes on and off in this circuit.

(2)

(Total for Question 7 = 14 marks)

20
*P71896A02032*
10 A student pours a known volume of hot water into a metal container. They place
the metal container into an insulated plastic cup containing an equal volume of
cold water.

metal container
with hot water

insulated plastic cup

with cold water

The student uses temperature probes to measure the temperatures of both the water
in the metal container and the water in the plastic cup.
The hot water has an initial temperature of 70 °C and the cold water has an initial
temperature of 5 °C.
(a) On the axes, sketch how the temperature of the hot water and the temperature of
the cold water vary with time.
(4)

Temperature
in °C

5
0
0 Time in minutes

28
*P71896A02832*
(b) Explain why the temperatures of the hot water and the cold water change.
You should refer to different types of thermal energy transfer in your answer.
(4)

(Total for Question 10 = 11 marks)

29
*P71896A02932* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Paper
Time 2 hours
reference 4PH1/1PR 4SD0/1PR

Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1PR
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator, protractor

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• Fill in theis boxes
If pencil used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• centre number andat candidate
the top of this page with your name,
number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P71897A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.

J:1/1/1/
*P71897A0132*
3 The diagram shows a balloon with a mass attached held at rest just below the surface
of a deep pool of water.

air
water

balloon

mass

(a) The balloon and mass are released.

The graph shows the velocity-time graph for the balloon and mass as they fall
through the water.

6
Velocity
in m/s
4

0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Time in s

8
*P71897A0832*
(i) Use information from the graph to determine the terminal velocity of the
balloon and mass.
(1)

terminal velocity = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(ii) Explain how the balloon reaches terminal velocity.
You should use ideas about forces acting on the balloon in your answer.
(3)

9
*P71897A0932* Turn over
(b) (i) State the formula linking pressure difference, height, density and gravitational
field strength.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the increase in pressure on the balloon when it has reached a depth
of 25 m in the water.
[for water, density = 1000 kg/m3]
(2)

pressure increase = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pa

(iii) At the surface, the atmospheric pressure on the balloon is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
Show that the total pressure on the balloon at a depth of 25 m is 3.5 × 105 Pa.
(1)

(iv) At the surface, where the pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa, the balloon has a volume
of 0.46 m3.
Calculate the volume of the balloon at a depth of 25 m.
(3)

volume = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m3

(Total for Question 3 = 11 marks)

10
*P71897A01032*
4 A student investigates how the current in a filament lamp varies with the voltage
across it.
The student has this equipment
• filament lamp
• cell
• variable resistor
• ammeter
• voltmeter
• connecting wires
(a) Draw a circuit diagram that the student could use for this investigation.
(4)

11
*P71897A01132* Turn over
(b) The table gives the student’s results.

Voltage in V Current in A

0.0 0.0

1.0 0.38

2.0 0.61

3.0 0.80

4.0 0.90

5.0 0.96

6.0 1.00

(i) Plot the results on the grid.

(1)
(ii) Draw the curve of best fit.
(1)

1.0

0.8

0.6
Current
in A
0.4

0.2

0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
Voltage in V

12
*P71897A01232*
(c) The filament of the lamp is made of metal.
The student suggests that a straight line on the graph is more appropriate than a
curve because current is directly proportional to voltage for a metal.
(i) Suggest how the student could improve their investigation to find out
whether a straight line or curve is more appropriate.
(1)

(ii) Explain why the student should not expect current to be proportional to
voltage for this filament lamp.
(2)

(Total for Question 4 = 9 marks)

13
*P71897A01332* Turn over
6 The diagram shows a small computer in two difference cases, X and Y.
The electronic chip in the computer is hot when in use. Each case is designed to cool
the computer chip.

hot air from

inside case
plastic case aluminium case

fan metal
block
chip chip
plastic circuit board plastic circuit board

case X case Y

Case X is made of white plastic and has a fan.

Case Y is made of black-painted aluminium metal and has no fan. There is a metal
block that is in contact with the case and the chip.
(a) Explain the main method of heat transfer from the chip to the surroundings for
case X.
(3)

(b) Explain the main method of heat transfer from the chip to the surroundings for
case Y.
(3)

16
*P71897A01632*
(c) (i) State the formula linking power, current and voltage.
(1)

(ii) The small computer operates at a voltage of 5.1 V with a current of 2.9 A.
Calculate the power of the small computer.
Give the unit.
(3)

power = .............................................................. unit ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 10 marks)

17
*P71897A01732* Turn over
8 A student wants to determine the density of air using an irregularly-shaped balloon
made of metal foil.
The balloon has a label stating that the volume of the balloon when full is 490 cm3.
This is part of the student’s method.
Step 1 measure the mass of the empty balloon
Step 2 fill the balloon with air
Step 3 measure the mass of the full balloon
Step 4 subtract the mass of the empty balloon from the mass of the full balloon.
(a) (i) Name the equipment the student could use to measure the mass of
the balloon.
(1)

(ii) Suggest how the student could improve the reliability of their data.
(1)

(b) The table shows the student’s results.

Mass of empty balloon in g 15.00

Mass of balloon when full of air in g 15.61

Volume of air in cm3 490

Calculate the density of air to 2 significant figures.

Give the unit.
(4)

density = .............................................................. unit ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20
*P71897A02032*
(c) Describe how the volume of the balloon full of air could be measured using a
large beaker and some water.
You may use a diagram to help your answer.
(3)

(Total for Question 8 = 9 marks)

21
*P71897A02132* Turn over
10 The diagram shows the forces acting on a firework at take-off.

thrust 28 N

weight 1.6 N

(a) (i) Calculate the magnitude of the resultant force on the firework.
(1)

magnitude of resultant force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(ii) State the formula linking resultant force, mass and acceleration.
(1)

(iii) The mass of the firework is 160 g.

Calculate the acceleration of the firework.
(3)

acceleration = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

24
*P71897A02432*
(iv) Explain how the acceleration of the firework changes between take-off and
running out of fuel.
You can assume that the thrust force stays the same as the firework burns
the fuel.
(3)

(b) The firework makes a sound with constant frequency.

As the firework moves upwards, people on the ground notice that the frequency
of the sound they hear changes.
This is called the Doppler effect.
Explain how the Doppler effect causes the observed frequency of sound to
change for the people on the ground.
(4)

(Total for Question 10 = 12 marks)

25
*P71897A02532* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• Fill in theis boxes
If pencil used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• centre number andat candidate
the top of this page with your name,
number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P71898A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.

J:1/1/1/1/
*P71898A0120*
Answer ALL questions.

1 The photograph shows a person using a roll of plastic wrapping to cover a plate
of food.
The plastic wrapping sticks to the plate due to electrostatic charges.

(Source: © goffkein.pro/Shutterstock)

The passage explains why the plastic wrapping sticks to the plate.
Use words from the box to complete the passage.
Each word may be used once, more than once, or not at all.

attract electrons negative neutral

neutrons positive protons repel

The person pulls a layer of plastic wrapping from the roll.

Forces between the layers of wrapping transfer particles called ........................................................... . . .

from one layer to another layer.

The layer gaining these particles acquires a .............................................................. charge.

The layer losing these particles acquires a .............................................................. charge.

The negatively charged layer of wrapping repels .............................................................. in the plate,

leaving a positive charge in the plate where it touches the plastic wrapping.

The wrapping and plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................... due to them having opposite charges.

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

3
*P71898A0320* Turn over
2 The photograph shows an ice cube placed on a metal tile.
The solid ice cube melts to become liquid water.

ice cube metal tile

water

(a) Compare the arrangement of particles in a solid with the arrangement of particles
in a liquid.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(3)

4
*P71898A0420*
(b) Describe the difference in the movement of particles in a solid compared with the
movement of particles in a liquid.
(2)

(c) After the ice cube has melted, the liquid water increases in temperature.
The water has a mass of 16 g and a specific heat capacity of 4200 J/kg °C.
Calculate the energy transferred to the liquid water as it increases in temperature
from 3 °C to 21 °C.
(3)

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

5
*P71898A0520* Turn over
4 A squash ball is made of rubber and used to play a game called squash.

(Source: © mexrix/Shutterstock)

A student observes that the squash ball bounces higher after its
temperature increases.
The student designs an investigation to see how the temperature of the ball affects
the maximum height after it bounces.

(a) State the independent and dependent variables in the student’s investigation.
(2)
independent variable

dependent variable

(b) The diagram shows the ball at its maximum height after it bounces.
Determine the distance the ball moves from the floor to its maximum height.
Assume the ball does not change shape when it bounces.
[1 cm on diagram = 4 cm in laboratory]
(2)

squash ball

floor

distance = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm
8
*P71898A0820*
(c) Design a method that the student could use to investigate how the temperature
of the ball affects the maximum height after it bounces.
Your answer should include details of
• apparatus needed
• measurements required
• control variables
You may draw a diagram to support your answer.
(6)

(Total for Question 4 = 10 marks)

9
*P71898A0920* Turn over
5 Diagram 1 shows a wooden plank balanced horizontally on two supports, A and B.
A block is suspended from the plank between the supports by a cable of
negligible weight.

force F
25 cm 55 cm

plank
A B
cable

block

Diagram 1

(a) The weight of the block is 260 N.

(i) State the formula linking moment, force and perpendicular distance from
the pivot.
(1)

(ii) By taking moments about support A, calculate force F.

Assume the weight of the plank is negligible.
(3)

force F = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

10
*P71898A01020*
(iii) Explain what will happen to the magnitude of force F if the block is moved
towards support B.
(3)

11
*P71898A01120* Turn over
(b) Diagram 2 shows the block and the cable connecting the block to the plank.

cable

block

Diagram 2

(i) The centre of gravity of the block is located at point X.

Draw an arrow on diagram 2 to show the weight of the block.
(2)

12
*P71898A01220*
(ii) The block also experiences a force due to the tension in the cable.
Explain why the block remains stationary when it is supported by this
tension force.
(2)

(iii) Explain why the forces acting on the block are not an example of Newton’s
third law of motion.
(2)

(Total for Question 5 = 13 marks)

13
*P71898A01320* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• Fill in theis boxes
If pencil used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• centre number andat candidate
the top of this page with your name,
number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P71899A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.

J:1/1/1/1/1/
*P71899A0124*
3 A tumble dryer is a household device that dries clothes.
The clothes rotate in a heated cylinder.
Clothes often stick together when they are dry because they become
electrostatically charged.
A student investigates how different materials charge electrostatically in a model
tumble dryer.
The diagram shows the model tumble dryer.

direction of rotation

cylinder

squares of
material

This is the student’s method.

• put four dry squares of the same material into the cylinder
• rotate the cylinder at constant speed for three minutes
• remove any squares that are stuck together
• measure the force needed to pull the squares apart
• repeat this for squares of different material

(a) (i) Name a device the student could use to measure a force.
(1)

(ii) State the independent and dependent variables in this investigation.

(2)

independent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................................................. ............................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

dependent .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) State a control variable in this investigation.

(1)

8
*P71899A0824*
(b) Explain how the squares of material stick together.
Use ideas about electrostatic charge in your answer.
(3)

(c) The table shows some of the student’s results.

Mean force to separate squares

Material
in N

wool 5.4

polyester 3.2

acrylic 6.5

Explain which type of graph is the most appropriate to present the results from
this investigation.
(2)

9
*P71899A0924* Turn over
(d) (i) State the formula linking charge, current and time.
(1)

(ii) When the squares of material are pulled apart there is a small spark.
There is a current of 4.3 × 10–6 A in the air for a time of 2.3 × 10–3 s.
Calculate the charge that is transferred.
(2)

charge = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C

(Total for Question 3 = 12 marks)

10
*P71899A01024*
4 Diagram 1 shows a circuit built by a student.

83 mA
17 Ω

6.2 Ω
228 mA

Diagram 1

(a) (i) State the formula linking voltage, current and resistance.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the voltage across the 17 Ω resistor.

(3)

voltage = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

(iii) State the voltage across the 6.2 Ω resistor.

(1)

voltage = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

(iv) Calculate the current in the battery.

(2)

current = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA

12
*P71899A01224*
(b) Diagram 2 shows a second circuit built by the student using the same battery
and resistors.

17 Ω 6.2 Ω

Diagram 2

Explain how the current in the battery will change now the resistors are
connected in series.
You do not need to do any calculations in your answer.
(3)

(Total for Question 4 = 10 marks)

13
*P71899A01324* Turn over
6 This question is about the use of water in central heating systems.

(a) A student does an investigation to find the specific heat capacity of water.
This is the list of equipment they use.
• heater with a power output of 50 W
• power supply
• beaker
• water
• thermometer
• stopwatch
• connecting leads
• balance

16
*P71899A01624*
Describe an investigation the student could use to find the specific heat capacity
of water.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(5)

17
*P71899A01724* Turn over
(b) The diagram shows a simplified central heating system viewed from above.

radiator
boiler

house
radiator
pipe

radiator

Pipes transport hot water around a house to radiators and back to the boiler.
The boiler heats water from 16 °C to 65 °C.
(i) Calculate the energy transferred from the boiler to 75 kg of water to raise the
temperature of the water from 16 °C to 65 °C.
[for water, specific heat capacity = 4200 J/kg °C]
(3)

energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

18
*P71899A01824*
(ii) The radiators transfer energy from the water to the air in the house.
The temperature of the water in the heating system decreases by 4 °C due to
heat transferred to the air.
This causes the air in the house to increase in temperature by 15 °C.
The mass of air in the house and the mass of water in the heating system are
approximately the same.
Explain why there is a larger temperature change in the air.
(3)

(Total for Question 6 = 11 marks)

19
*P71899A01924* Turn over
7 A crumple zone is a safety feature in a car.
It is a part of the car that is designed to collapse during a collision.
A student investigates the effectiveness of crumple zones.
The student rolls two model cars down a ramp.
Each car comes to rest when it hits a large metal block.
A data logger measures the mean force applied to the car during the collision with
the block.
The diagram shows the equipment used in the investigation.

data
logger
metal
ramp block 0.0 N

Car 1 has a paper crumple zone at the front.

Car 2 has no paper crumple zone.
The table shows the student’s results.

Mean force on car from block Velocity just before car hits block
Car
in N in m/s

1 2.5 3.0

2 4.9 3.0

(a) The mass of each car is 0.074 kg.

Calculate the time taken for the velocity of car 1 to decrease from 3.0 m/s
to 0.0 m/s.
(3)

time taken = ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

20
*P71899A02024*
(b) State the magnitude and direction of the force on the metal block, when car 2
collides with the block.
(2)

magnitude = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 7 marks)

21
*P71899A02124* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Thursday 25 May 2023
Paper
Morning (Time: 2 hours)
reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
•• IfFillpencil is used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
•• Answer all questions.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
•• Try toyour
Write answers neatly and in good English.
answer every question.
• your answers if you have time at the end.
Check

Turn over

P71955A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd. *P71955A0132*
N:1/1/1/1/1/
2 A student investigates how the current in a filament lamp changes when the voltage
across the lamp is varied.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) Draw a circuit diagram the student could use in their investigation.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) The graph shows the student’s results.

2.5

2.0

1.5
Current
in A
1.0
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0.5

0.0
0 2 4 6 8
Voltage in V

6
*P71955A0632* 
(i) Describe the relationship between current and voltage shown on the graph.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) State the formula linking resistance, voltage and current.

(1)

(iii) Use the graph to determine the resistance of the filament lamp when the
voltage across the lamp is 7.2 V.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

resistance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ω
(Total for Question 2 = 10 marks)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

7
 *P71955A0732* Turn over
3 A family has a television set.
(a) The television set has a low power mode called standby.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
When on standby, the power rating of the television set is 0.27 W.
Calculate the energy transferred to the television set on standby in 12 hours.
(3)

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) In normal use, the current in the television set is 0.31 A.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Explain how a fuse works to protect the television set if there is a fault.
(3)

(ii) Explain why a 13 A fuse is not an appropriate choice of fuse to use in the plug
of this television set.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

(Total for Question 3 = 8 marks)

8
*P71955A0832* 
5 The drawing shows a camel and a person in a desert.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(Source: © Hennadii H/Shutterstock)

(a) Describe a method you could use to find the pressure a person exerts on the
ground when standing on two feet.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

12
*P71955A01232* 
(b) The total area of contact of the camel’s feet with the ground is 1300 cm2.
The mass of the camel is 660 kg.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the pressure this camel exerts on the ground.

(3)

pressure = ............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N / cm2

(Total for Question 5 = 7 marks)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
 *P71955A01332* Turn over
(b) The diagram shows a part of the knee called the patella. The patella has been
removed from a person’s knee.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
The patella is a small, irregularly shaped bone that is denser than water.
Describe how to find the mass and the volume of the patella bone.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

16
*P71955A01632* 
(c) A scientist finds the volume and mass of a patella.
The mass of the patella is 17 g.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The volume of the patella is 13 cm3.

Calculate the density of the patella.
Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

density = ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g / cm3

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 6 = 13 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

17
 *P71955A01732* Turn over
7 The circuit diagram shows a motor, power supply, switch and variable resistor
connected in series.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
+ –

(a) The switch is open and the motor is not moving.

State how much energy is in the kinetic energy store of the motor.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

kinetic energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) The switch is closed.
The motor takes 0.42 seconds to reach its maximum speed of rotation.
The mean current in the motor is 3.9 A.
The voltage across the motor is 7.1 V.
Show that the work done on the motor during the 0.42 seconds is about 12 J.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

work done = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

18
*P71955A01832* 
(c) Complete the Sankey diagram for the electric motor during the 0.42 seconds by
giving the missing information.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred to
motor kinetic energy store
of motor
....... ............. ............ ........... .. ............. ....

from battery ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

12 J

..............................................................

store
of surroundings
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(d) Use the Sankey diagram to calculate the efficiency of the process of bringing the
motor to its maximum speed of rotation.
(3)

efficiency = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . %
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 7 = 9 marks)

19
 *P71955A01932* Turn over
8 In some countries, snow can fall and collect on the ground.
Diagram 1 shows that after the snow has fallen, the sky can be clear, leaving the snow

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
directly exposed to the Sun.

Sun

snow

ground

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 1

(a) Explain why the white snow will take a long time to melt, even though directly
exposed to the Sun.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

20
*P71955A02032* 
(b) Diagram 2 shows a different piece of ground that has a metal drain cover.
If the snow lands on metal, the snow takes a shorter time to melt.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Sun

snow

metal drain cover

ground
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 2

Explain why the snow melts in a shorter time on the metal drain cover.
(2)

(c) Explain how a convection current above the snow increases the time taken for the
snow to melt.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 8 = 6 marks)

21
 *P71955A02132* Turn over
9 A manometer is a device that can be used to measure the pressure difference
between gas from a gas tap and the atmosphere.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
When a gas tap is connected to the manometer, the liquid in the manometer moves
due to the additional pressure of the gas.

gas from
manometer gas tap

liquid 0.094 m

Before connecting gas tap After connecting gas tap

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) The pressure difference is linked to the difference in height of the two surfaces of
the liquid by the formula

pressure difference = density × g × height difference

The height difference between the two surfaces is 0.094 m.

Calculate the pressure difference between the gas from the gas tap and
the atmosphere.
[for liquid, density = 14 000 kg / m3 ]
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

pressure difference = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pa

22
*P71955A02232* 
(b) The graph shows how the velocity of the surface of the liquid changes with time
from when the gas tap is opened to when the water level stops moving.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

30
Velocity
in cm / s
20

10
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
Time in s

(i) Use the graph to show that the distance travelled by the surface of the liquid
is 4.7 cm.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the acceleration of the surface of the liquid.

(3)

acceleration = ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm / s2

23
 *P71955A02332* Turn over
(c) Explain how the gas pressure changes if the temperature of the gas increases.
You should use ideas about particles in your answer.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(3)

(Total for Question 9 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

24
*P71955A02432* 
10 A student investigates how the time taken for a ball to roll down a slope changes
with the distance from the bottom of the slope.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
This is the student’s method.
• place a ball on the slope 10 cm from the bottom of the slope
• release the ball and start a stopwatch
• stop the stopwatch when the ball arrives at the bottom of the slope
• record the time taken for the ball to roll down the slope
• repeat for different distances from the bottom of the slope
(a) Complete the table by placing a tick (ü) to show which variables are the
independent, dependent and control variables in this investigation.
(4)

Independent Dependent Control

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Surface of slope

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Angle of slope

Distance travelled

Time taken

(b) The table shows the student’s results.

Distance travelled in cm Time taken in s

10 0.41

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

20 0.58

30 0.71

40 0.82

50 0.91

(i) Plot the student’s data on the grid.

(1)
(ii) Draw a best fit curve.
(1)

26
*P71955A02632* 
50
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

30
Distance
in cm
20

10
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Time in s

(iii) The student concludes that the results obey this relationship

distance ÷ (time2) = constant

Use the student’s data to deduce whether the student’s results support
this conclusion.
(4)

(Total for Question 10 = 10 marks)

27
 *P71955A02732* Turn over
11 Diagram 1 shows a light-emitting diode (LED) and a resistor in series with a cell and
an ammeter.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
1.5 V

0.63 V 95 Ω

Diagram 1

(a) The voltage across the LED is 0.63 V.

Calculate the current in the circuit.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Give your answer in milliamps.
(4)

current = .................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

28
*P71955A02832* 
(b) Diagram 2 shows a second LED and an extra resistor connected in parallel with
the cell.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

1.5 V

Diagram 2
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The resistor and the LED are the same as the components used in diagram 1.
The two resistors are identical and the two LEDs are identical.
Explain how the ammeter reading will change.
(4)

(Total for Question 11 = 8 marks)

29
 *P71955A02932* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Thursday 25 May 2023
Morning (Time: 2 hours) Paper
reference 4PH1/1PR 4SD0/1PR

Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1PR
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• IfFillpencil is used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• centrein the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P71956A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.

N:1/1/1/1/
*P71956A0132*
3 A model electric motor is used to lift a load through a vertical height.

power supply

electric motor
joulemeter

load

(a) The load has a mass of 400 g and gains 3.2 J of energy in its gravitational store
when lifted.
(i) State the formula linking gravitational potential energy, mass,
gravitational field strength (g) and height.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the height the load is lifted.

(3)

height = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

(iii) State the amount of useful work done on the load by the motor when the
load is lifted through this height.
(1)

work done = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

9
*P71956A0932* Turn over
(b) The load is lifted at a constant speed.
Diagram 1 shows the lifting force acting on the load as it is lifted.
Draw a labelled arrow on diagram 1 to show the other force acting on the load.
Ignore the effects of air resistance.
(2)

lifting force

load

Diagram 1

(c) A joulemeter measures the amount of energy transferred electrically to the motor
as the motor lifts the load.
The joulemeter displays a reading of 11.0 J when the load has gained 3.2 J of
energy in its gravitational store.
(i) Calculate the efficiency of the motor.
(3)

efficiency = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10
*P71956A01032*
(ii) Justify why 7.8 J of energy must be dissipated into the thermal store of the
surroundings as the load is lifted.
(2)

(iii) Diagram 2 is an incomplete Sankey diagram.

Complete the Sankey diagram to show the energy transferred by the motor.
(3)

input
energy

wasted output
energy

Diagram 2

(Total for Question 3 = 15 marks)

11
*P71956A01132* Turn over
5 A car is travelling in a straight line along a road. The car passes a person standing at
the side of the road.

Before passing the person, the driver of the car presses the car’s horn. The horn
makes a loud sound of constant frequency.
The horn continues to make a sound until after the car has passed the person.
Discuss the differences in the frequencies of the sound heard by
• the driver of the car
• the person at the side of the road

(Total for Question 5 = 6 marks)

14
*P71956A01432*
6 A student investigates how the current in a 60 Ω resistor varies with the voltage
across the resistor.
(a) The student has access to this equipment
• 12 V battery
• ammeter and voltmeter
• 60 Ω resistor
• variable resistor
• switch
• connecting wires
Draw a circuit diagram to show how the student could connect this equipment to
carry out the investigation.
(4)

15
*P71956A01532* Turn over
(b) Describe a suitable method the student could use for this investigation.
(4)

0.30

0.20
Current
in A
0.10

0.00
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Voltage in V

16
*P71956A01632*
(ii) The student repeats their investigation with a 120 Ω resistor.
Explain how a current–voltage graph for a 120 Ω resistor compares with the
current–voltage graph for the 60 Ω resistor.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 14 marks)

17
*P71956A01732* Turn over
8 Diagram 1 shows a set of masses attached to a spring, which is suspended from
a support.

support

spring

masses

Diagram 1

(a) After the masses are added, the length of the spring is 14.6 cm.
The student measures the extension of the spring as 11.5 cm.
(i) Calculate the original length of the spring.
(1)

original length = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

(ii) The student removes the masses and notices that the spring does not show
elastic behaviour.
Predict a value for the new length of the spring after the masses have
been removed.
(1)

new length of spring = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

23
*P71956A02332* Turn over
(b) The student puts the masses back on the spring.
The student then pulls the masses down and releases them.
The masses vibrate up and down in a vertical direction, as shown in diagram 2.

support

spring

vibrations masses

Diagram 2

24
*P71956A02432*
The distance–time graph shows how the distance between the top of the masses
and the support changes with time as the masses vibrate.

Distance

Time

(i) Explain how the gradient of the graph shows that the masses accelerate as
they vibrate.
(3)

(ii) Add crosses (X) to the distance–time graph to show all the times when the
masses are not moving.
(2)

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

25
*P71956A02532* Turn over
9 The driver of a racing car makes a pit stop during a race to change the tyres on the
racing car.
The area where the tyres are changed is called the pit lane.

(Source: © Hafiz Johari/Shutterstock)

(a) Before entering the pit lane, the speed of the car must decrease for safety reasons.

(i) The mass of the racing car is 830 kg.

The maximum braking force is 41 000 N.
Show that the maximum deceleration of the racing car is
approximately 50 m / s2.
(3)

(ii) The racing car is travelling at an initial speed of 72 m / s.

Calculate the minimum distance needed to decrease the speed of the racing
car from 72 m / s to 26 m / s.
(3)

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

26
*P71956A02632*
(b) The racing car slows down using its brakes.
The brakes work using friction.
The brakes become very hot when the racing car slows down.
Using ideas about energy, explain why the brakes become hot.
(3)

(c) The tyres of the racing car also get very hot during a race.
A mechanic has to handle the hot tyres during the pit stop.
They wear protective gloves which have several layers of insulating materials.
Explain how the layers of insulating materials in the gloves reduce the risk of the
mechanic burning their hands on the hot tyres.
(2)

(Total for Question 9 = 11 marks)

27
*P71956A02732* Turn over
10 A dam is a structure designed to hold water in a reservoir.

dam water in a reservoir

(a) The water in the reservoir has a depth of 35 m.

(i) State the formula linking pressure difference, height, density and g.
(1)

(ii) Atmospheric pressure at the surface of the reservoir is 100 kPa.

Calculate the total pressure at the bottom of the reservoir.
[for water, density = 1000 kg / m3]
(3)

pressure = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

28
*P71956A02832*
(b) An underwater camera is used in the water reservoir.
The camera lens experiences a force of 430 N at a pressure of 260 kPa.
(i) State the formula linking pressure, force and area.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the area of the camera lens.

Give a suitable unit.
(4)

area = .............................................................. unit ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Sea water has a density of 1030 kg / m3.

Explain how the design of the dam would need to be changed to hold the same
depth of sea water safely.
(2)

(Total for Question 10 = 11 marks)

29
*P71956A02932* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 16 June 2023
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, protractor, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
•• IfFillpencil is used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
•• Answer all questions.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
•• The total mark for this paper is 70.
The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
•• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
Try to answer every question.
• Check your answers if you have time at the end.
Turn over

P71957A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd. *P71957A0124*
N:1/1/1/1/
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .
1 A pencil has a weight of 0.16 N.
(a) What is the mass of the pencil?
(1)
A 1.6 g

B 16 g

C 160 g

D 1600 g

(b) The diagram shows the pencil with one end resting on a small block.
F
7.4 cm pivot

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

3.7 cm
0.16 N

A finger provides an upwards force, F, to keep the pencil horizontal.

(i) The weight of the pencil is 0.16 N.
Calculate the moment of the weight of the pencil about the pivot.
Use the formula

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

moment = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N cm

4
*P71957A0424* 
(ii) State the moment of the force F.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

moment = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N cm
(iii) Show that force F is 0.080 N.
(2)

(Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

5
 *P71957A0524* Turn over
2 A solid bar of chocolate is taken from a refrigerator.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(Source: © MarySan/Shutterstock)

(a) The temperature of the chocolate bar is 5 °C.

Describe the arrangement and motion of the particles inside the chocolate bar.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) The chocolate is heated at a constant rate until the temperature reaches 45 °C.
The chocolate has a melting point of 32 °C and a boiling point of 55 °C.
(i) Describe the motion of the particles in the chocolate when the chocolate is at
a temperature of 45 °C.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Which of these is used to measure the temperature of the chocolate?

(1)
A balance

B ruler

C stopwatch

D thermometer

6
*P71957A0624* 
(iii) Use the axes to sketch a graph of how the temperature of the chocolate
changes with time when it is heated from 5 °C to 45 °C.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Temperature
25
in °C

5
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Time
(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

7
 *P71957A0724* Turn over
3 The diagram shows the inside of an oscilloscope.
Electrons leave the electron supply and accelerate towards the screen.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The stream of electrons hits the screen.

– +

stream of electrons
electron
supply

positively charged screen

grid
(a) The grid is connected to the positive terminal of a high voltage power supply.
(i) Explain, in terms of the movement of particles, how the grid has become
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

positively charged.
(2)

(ii) State the formula linking kinetic energy, mass and speed.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) Calculate the speed of an electron when it has 1.3 × 10 –15 J of kinetic energy.
The mass of an electron is 9.1 × 10 –31 kg.
(3)

speed = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

9
 *P71957A0924* Turn over
(b) The stream of electrons spreads out as it travels towards the screen.
Explain why the electrons in the stream move apart from each other.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(2)

(c) The oscilloscope can cause the electrons to move in a circle.

This produces a circular pattern on the screen.

1 cm

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Use the scale to determine the radius of the circle.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

radius = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

10
*P71957A01024* 
4 The diagram shows two birds, just before bird X catches the smaller bird Y.
Both birds are travelling horizontally at constant velocity.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
bird X

bird Y

velocity = 13 m / s velocity

mass = 0.41 kg
(a) Show that the momentum of bird X is about 5 kg m / s.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) The momentum of bird Y just before it is caught is 0.15 kg m / s.
Calculate the total momentum of the birds just before bird X catches bird Y.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s
(c) State the total momentum of the birds just after bird X has caught bird Y.
(1)

momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

12
*P71957A01224* 
(d) Bird Y has a mass of 0.17 kg.
Calculate the velocity of the birds just after bird X has caught bird Y.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

velocity = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s
(Total for Question 4 = 7 marks)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
 *P71957A01324* Turn over
8 Concrete on top of buildings can be used to heat water.
The photograph shows a concrete and water heating system being built into the roof

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
of a house.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) A scientist wants to determine the specific heat capacity of concrete.

The diagram shows some of the equipment they could use.

12 V
A

lid
insulating material

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

concrete
thermometer

electrical heater

22
*P71957A02224* 
Describe a suitable method to find the specific heat capacity of concrete.
(5)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) Explain the advantage of the concrete having a high specific heat capacity when
it is used to heat water in the heating system.
(2)

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

23
 *P71957A02324*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 16 June 2023
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• IfFillpencil is used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• centrein the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

N:1/1/1/1/1/
*P71958RA0124*
Answer ALL questions.

1 (a) The boxes show some physical quantities and their units.
Draw a straight line from each physical quantity to its correct unit.
One has been done for you.
(3)

Physical quantity Unit

velocity metre per second squared (m / s2)

force watt (W)

power newton (N)

moment metre per second (m / s)

acceleration newton metre (N m)

(b) Some physical quantities are scalars and other physical quantities are vectors.
(i) State the difference between a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.
(1)

(ii) Give an example of a scalar quantity.

(1)

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

3
*P71958RA0324* Turn over
2 This question is about different methods of generating electricity.
(a) Natural gas can be burned to generate electricity.
Name the energy store that decreases when natural gas is burned.
(1)

(b) Burning natural gas and the movement of water waves can both be used to
generate electricity.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of these two methods of
generating electricity.
(4)

(Total for Question 2 = 5 marks)

4
*P71958RA0424*
3 A cleaning product is applied to a car using a sponge pad.
The sponge pad is rubbed against the car to apply the cleaning product.

(a) Some parts of the car are made of metal and other parts are made of plastic.
The metal parts of the car are earthed.
Explain why the pad becomes charged when rubbing the plastic parts, but not
when rubbing the metal parts.
(3)

6
*P71958RA0624*
(b) The sponge pad is held near a metal post that is connected to the ground.
The sponge pad discharges with a small spark through the air to the metal post.
(i) The sponge pad stores 5.0 mJ of energy in its electrostatic store.
The voltage between the sponge pad and the metal post is 6000 V.
Calculate the charge transferred by the spark.
(3)

charge transferred = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C

(ii) The small spark between the sponge pad and the metal post demonstrates
that the sponge pad is charged.
Describe a different experiment that could demonstrate that the sponge pad
is charged.
You may draw a diagram to support your answer.
(2)

(Total for Question 3 = 8 marks)

7
*P71958RA0724* Turn over
4 The photograph shows a dummy during a test of the safety features of a car in
a collision.

Before the collision, the dummy in the car is travelling at a velocity of 14 m / s.

The dummy has a momentum of 1100 kg m / s.
(a) (i) State the formula linking momentum, mass and velocity.
(1)

(ii) Show that the mass of the dummy is approximately 80 kg.

(3)

8
*P71958RA0824*
(b) The dummy is brought to rest during the collision by a mean force of 15 kN.
Calculate the time taken for the dummy to be brought to rest in the collision.
(3)

time taken = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(c) The car being tested is fitted with airbags.

Using ideas about momentum, explain how an airbag reduces the force
experienced by the dummy in the collision.
(2)

(Total for Question 4 = 9 marks)

9
*P71958RA0924* Turn over
5 This question is about specific heat capacity.
(a) State what is meant by the term specific heat capacity.
(3)

(b) The diagram shows a sample of solid stearic acid being heated in a boiling tube
using a water bath.

thermometer

support

boiling tube containing

stearic acid

water bath

10
*P71958RA01024*
The mass of stearic acid in the boiling tube is 58 g.
When the boiling tube is placed in the water bath, the temperature of the stearic
acid increases from 21 °C to 37 °C. The stearic acid does not melt.
As the temperature of the stearic acid increases, an additional 3500 J of energy
needs to be transferred electrically to the water bath.
(i) Using this data, show that the specific heat capacity of the solid stearic acid is
approximately 4 J / g °C.
(3)

(ii) The true value for the specific heat capacity of solid stearic acid is 2.3 J / g °C.
Give a reason for the difference between the value in (i) and the true value.
(1)

(Total for Question 5 = 7 marks)

11
*P71958RA01124* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Thursday 16 November 2023
Paper
Morning (Time: 2 hours)
reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P73427A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.
Z:1/1/1/1/1/1/
*P73427A0136*
2 The diagram shows four graphs, P, Q, R and S. Each graph shows a different
relationship between current and time.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Current Current

0 0
0 Time 0 Time

Graph P Graph Q

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Current Current

0 0
0 Time 0 Time

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Graph R Graph S

6
*P73427A0636* 
The table gives descriptions of the relationships between current and time shown by
graphs P, Q, R and S.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Complete the table by giving the correct graph for each description.

Description Graph

current directly proportional to time

current increasing at a decreasing rate

current has a linear relationship to time but is

not directly proportional

current decreasing at a decreasing rate

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 2 = 4 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

7
 *P73427A0736* Turn over
4 This question is about a filament lamp.
(a) Which of these is the correct circuit symbol for a filament lamp?

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)

A B

C D

(b) The filament lamp emits visible light.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The table gives some statements about visible light.
Place ticks (ü) in the boxes to show which statements are correct for visible light.
(2)

Statements Correct (ü)

visible light is a longitudinal wave

visible light transfers energy

visible light transfers matter

visible light has a longer wavelength than x-rays

visible light travels faster in water than in air

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10
*P73427A01036* 
(d) The filament lamp is connected in a circuit with a switch and a battery of
three cells.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
battery

switch

filament lamp

(i) When the switch is on, the filament lamp transfers 120 J of energy in a time of

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

3.0 minutes.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Each cell has a voltage of 1.5 V.
Calculate the current in the filament lamp.
(3)

current = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
(ii) A small plotting compass is placed near the wires in the circuit.
When the switch is turned on, the compass needle moves to a new position.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Give a reason why the compass needle moves.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 10 marks)

12
*P73427A01236* 
5 A student uses this apparatus to investigate energy transfer by conduction in metals.

metal strips
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

wooden ring

metal tack

This is the student’s method.

• attach four strips, each made of a different metal, to a wooden ring
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

• use wax to attach a metal tack to the end of each metal strip
• place the strips above a Bunsen burner
• light the Bunsen burner and start a stopwatch at the same time
• when enough energy has been transferred to the wax, it melts, causing the metal
tack to fall
• record the time taken for each tack to fall
(a) Explain how the wooden ring makes the apparatus safer for the student to use.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13
 *P73427A01336* Turn over
(b) Describe how energy is transferred by conduction through the metal strips.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Time for
tack to fall 40
in s

0
aluminium brass copper iron
Metal

(i) Justify the use of a bar chart in this investigation.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
*P73427A01436* 
(ii) State how the student could improve the reliability of their results.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) The student concludes that iron is the best metal for transferring energy
by conduction.
Evaluate the student’s conclusion.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15
 *P73427A01536* Turn over
6 (a) The graph shows how the velocity of a ball rolling down a long ramp changes
with time.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
3.0

2.0
Velocity
in m/s
1.0

0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Time in s

(i) Using the graph, calculate the acceleration of the ball.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

acceleration = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

(ii) State the feature of the graph that gives the distance travelled by the ball.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P73427A01636* 
(iii) Calculate the distance travelled by the ball in 2.5 seconds.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
(b) The table shows data for the ball after it has travelled for two different times.

Time in s Distance in m

5.0 15
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10.0 60

A student suggests that these results obey the relationship:

distance
= constant
time2

Use data from the table to deduce whether the results support this suggestion.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 10 marks)

17
 *P73427A01736* Turn over
9 Diagram 1 shows some of the stages of electricity generation in a nuclear
power station.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

wires

steam
turbine
reactor

water

generator
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

pressurised water

Diagram 1

(a) Nuclear fission takes place inside the reactor of the nuclear power station.
(i) Give the name of a fuel that could be used in the reactor.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Energy is released from the fuel in the reactor by nuclear fission.
Describe the process of nuclear fission that takes place inside the reactor.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25
 *P73427A02536* Turn over
(b) High pressure steam transfers energy from the reactor to a turbine.
The turbine spins as the steam passes through it.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Diagram 2 shows a simplified generator connected to the turbine.

wires for
transmission of
electricity

coils of
wire

magnets

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

shaft

turbine

Diagram 2

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

26
*P73427A02636* 
(i) Explain how electricity is generated by the generator.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) At night the power station does not need to generate as much electricity.
Suggest how the output of this generator could be reduced.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) The generator produces alternating current.

Describe the differences between alternating current (a.c.) and
direct current (d.c.).
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 9 = 11 marks)

27
 *P73427A02736* Turn over
10 This question is about electrical resistors.
(a) Diagram 1 shows a 13 kΩ resistor connected to a 5.8 V battery.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
5.8 V

13 kΩ

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 1

(i) State the formula linking voltage, current and resistance.

(1)

(ii) Calculate the current in the resistor.

(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

current = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

28
*P73427A02836* 
(b) Diagram 2 shows a 200 Ω resistor connected in parallel with a 13 kΩ resistor.

5.8 V
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13 kΩ

200 Ω
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 2

(i) Complete the circuit diagram by adding a suitable meter to diagram 2 to

measure the current in the 13 kΩ resistor.
(1)
(ii) The switch in the circuit is closed.
Explain what happens to the current in the 13 kΩ resistor and the current in
the battery.
(5)
13 kΩ resistor

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

battery

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 10 = 10 marks)

29
 *P73427A02936* Turn over
11 The diagram shows a simple barometer designed to measure atmospheric pressure.

trapped gas

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
not to scale

liquid height

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) (i) State the formula linking pressure difference, height, density and gravitational
field strength, g.
(1)

(ii) The total pressure at point X is 117 kPa.

The pressure of the trapped gas is 12 kPa.
Calculate the height of the liquid above point X.
[ density of liquid = 1.36 × 104 kg/m3 ]
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

height = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

30
*P73427A03036* 
12 The photograph shows a toy called a marble run.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
point A

pipe

point B
table marble

A student lifts a marble from the table to the top of the marble run at point A.
They release the marble from point A and it rolls through pipes to reach the
bottom of the marble run at point B.
The marble leaves the marble run at point B and rolls across the table.
As the marble rolls, energy is transferred due to the different forces acting on
the marble.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) Describe the energy transfers from before the student lifts the marble to when
the marble reaches point B of the marble run.
(5)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32
*P73427A03236* 
(b) The student wants to measure how much energy the marble loses as it moves
from point A to point B.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) The student needs to measure the speed of the marble as it leaves the marble
run at point B.
Describe a method the student could use to measure this speed.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) The difference in height between point A and point B is 0.21 m.

The mass of the marble is 5.5 g.
The marble leaves the marble run at point B with a speed of 0.76 m/s.
Calculate the energy lost by the marble as it rolls from point A to point B.
(5)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy lost = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 12 = 13 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 110 MARKS

33
 *P73427A03336*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Wednesday 22 November 2023
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P73429A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.
Z:1/1/1/1/1/1/
*P73429A0128*
2 This question is about moments.
Diagram 1 shows the raised lower leg of a person.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
F

0.25 m
0.28 m

weight of
pivot lower leg

0.55 m

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 1

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6
*P73429A0628* 
(a) (i) The moment of the weight of the lower leg about the pivot is 19 N m.
A vertical force, F, is applied to the person’s foot to keep the lower leg raised.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The lower leg does not move.

Calculate the magnitude of force F, using the formula

moment = force × perpendicular distance from pivot

(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

force F = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(ii) Which distance is used to calculate the moment of the weight of the lower leg
about the pivot?
(1)
A 0.25 m

B 0.28 m
C 0.30 m

D 0.55 m
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

7
 *P73429A0728* Turn over
(b) Diagram 2 shows the person resting their lower leg on two supports.

force X force Y

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
support A support B

weight of
lower leg

Diagram 2

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

8
*P73429A0828* 
(i) The centre of gravity of the lower leg is 0.25 m away from support A and
0.35 m away from support B.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Explain whether force X or force Y is larger.

Ignore the weight of the upper leg.
(3)

(ii) A bag of ice is placed on the lower leg, vertically above the centre of gravity.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

This causes force X and force Y to increase.

The bag is then moved towards the person’s foot.
Describe how force X and force Y change as the bag is moved towards the
person’s foot.
(3)

(Total for Question 2 = 9 marks)

9
 *P73429A0928* Turn over
3 The diagram shows some apparatus that can be used to determine the specific
heat capacity of water.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
12V supply
+ –

A
V

lid

beaker
insulating material

water

electrical heater
thermometer

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10
*P73429A01028* 
(a) Describe how a student could use this apparatus to determine the specific
heat capacity of water.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Include details of any additional equipment needed in your answer.

(6)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11
 *P73429A01128* Turn over
(b) (i) The table shows the student’s results.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
energy transferred to the thermal
54 000
store of the water in J

mass of water in kg 0.56

temperature change of water in °C 22

Use the student’s results to calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

specific heat capacity of water = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J / kg °C

(ii) Give two reasons why the energy from the heater is not all retained in the
thermal store of the water.
(2)

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

12
*P73429A01228* 
5 A sample of steam (water in a gas state) is cooled using a very cold freezer.
(a) The steam is cooled from an initial temperature of 150 °C.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Calculate the initial temperature of the steam in kelvin (K).
(1)

initial temperature = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

(b) The temperature-time graph shows how the temperature of the steam changes
during the cooling process.
The steam eventually becomes ice (water in a solid state).

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Temperature C

Time

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) The graph shows five stages, A, B, C, D and E, of the cooling process.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

State which stages of the cooling process show a change of state.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P73429A01628* 
(ii) Describe the differences in the arrangement of particles when the sample is in
a gas state (steam) and a solid state (ice).
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You may draw a diagram to help your answer.

(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) Explain whether or not the energy in the kinetic store of the particles changes
when the sample is changing state.
(3)

(Total for Question 5 = 7 marks)

17
 *P73429A01728* Turn over
6 This question is about momentum and forces.
(a) State the principle of conservation of momentum.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)

(b) The diagram shows an air track that can be used to investigate motion
without friction.
Air comes out through a series of small holes in the air track. The air lifts the glider
slightly above the track.
A small spacecraft engine floats at rest on a cushion of air.

spacecraft engine

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

glider
air in
air holes

(i) State the momentum of the spacecraft engine when it is at rest.

(1)

momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

(ii) The spacecraft engine ejects large numbers of xenon ions to the left.
A mass of 2.6 × 10−8 kg of xenon ions leaves the engine with a mean speed
of 26 km / s.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the momentum of all the ejected xenon ions.

(3)

momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

18
*P73429A01828* 
(iii) State the magnitude and direction of the spacecraft engine’s momentum after
these xenon ions leave the engine.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

magnitude of momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

direction of momentum = ........................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iv) The ions exert a force of 2.6 mN on the spacecraft engine.

The spacecraft engine has a mass of 1.2 kg.
Calculate the acceleration of the engine.
Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

acceleration = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s2
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

19
 *P73429A01928* Turn over
(c) The engine is designed to accelerate a spacecraft while the spacecraft is travelling
through space.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
The spacecraft carries a mass of 0.75 kg of xenon ions for the engine.
When the engine is used, 9.9 × 10−8 kg of xenon ions leave the engine
each second.
A student suggests that this small spacecraft engine would not be useful because
the acceleration it produces is very small.
Evaluate the student’s suggestion.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 6 = 13 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

20
*P73429A02028* 
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Wednesday 22 May 2024
Morning (Time: 2 hours) Paper
reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P

Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator, protractor, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Information
•• The total mark for this paper is 110.
The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

P75826A
©2024 Pearson Education Ltd.
F:1/1/1/1/1/1/
*P75826A0132*
5 (a) A metal spring obeys Hooke’s law.
Sketch a graph to show that the spring obeys Hooke’s law as it is stretched.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You should label both axes with appropriate physical quantities.

(3)

0
0
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11
 *P75826A01132* Turn over
(b) Diagram 1 shows an object suspended from a support using a metal spring.
The object is initially at rest.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
support

spring

object

Diagram 1

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) The object is pulled down and then released.
Diagram 2 shows the forces acting on the object at the instant it is released.

3.2 N

object

2.0 N

Diagram 2

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Determine the magnitude and direction of the resultant force acting on

the object.
(2)

magnitude of resultant force = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction of resultant force = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
*P75826A01232* 
(ii) The object has a mass of 0.20 kg.
Calculate the acceleration of the object at the instant it is released.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

acceleration = ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

(iii) Explain how the magnitude of the acceleration of the object changes, from
the instant the object is released until the first time the object returns to its
initial resting position.
You should refer to the forces acting on the object in your answer.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 5 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
 *P75826A01332* Turn over
7 The diagram shows a domestic lighting circuit.

230 V mains

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
voltage

lamp 1
22 mA switch 1

lamp 2
43 mA switch 2

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

lamp 3
17 mA switch 3

(a) Explain an advantage of using this circuit for domestic lighting.

(2)

(b) When switch 1 is closed, the current in lamp 1 is 22 mA.

(i) Give the name of the charged particle that moves in an electric current.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

16
*P75826A01632* 
(ii) Show that lamp 1 has a power of about 5 W.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) Calculate the energy transferred by lamp 1 when it is on for 30 seconds.

(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(c) The circuit is connected to the mains supply. Mains voltage is 230 V.
(i) State what is meant by the term voltage.
(1)

(ii) Switches 1 and 3 are closed, which turn on lamps 1 and 3.

Switch 2 is open.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the current in the mains supply.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

current = .................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA
(Total for Question 7 = 12 marks)

17
 *P75826A01732* Turn over
9 This question is about air pressure.
(a) During an aeroplane flight, a passenger drinks some water from a plastic bottle.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
The passenger then replaces the top to seal the bottle, as shown in diagram 1.

air

water

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 1

The air pressure outside the bottle is 80 kPa.

State the air pressure inside the bottle just after the bottle has been sealed.
(1)

air pressure = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

20
*P75826A02032* 
(b) As the aeroplane descends, the air pressure inside the aeroplane changes.
When the aeroplane lands, the passenger notices that the plastic bottle has
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

collapsed, as shown in diagram 2.

air

water
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 2

Explain why the bottle has collapsed.

(2)

(Total for Question 9 = 6 marks)

21
 *P75826A02132* Turn over
10 Diagram 1 shows the apparatus a student uses to investigate the bending of a
wooden strip.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Part of the wooden strip is clamped to a table.
A load is fixed to the free end of the wooden strip, causing it to bend.

length, L

wooden strip
load
clamp table clamp height, h

Diagram 1

The free end of the wooden strip is positioned a length, L, beyond the edge of the
table, as shown in diagram 1.
The weight of the load causes the end of the wooden strip to move down through a
height, h.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A student investigates how the length, L, affects the height, h.
(a) The load has a mass of 250 g.
Calculate the weight of the load.
Use the formula
weight = mass × gravitational field strength, g
(2)

weight = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P75826A02232* 
(b) This is the student’s method for the investigation.
• clamp the wooden strip so that L = 20 cm
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

• fix the load to the end of the wooden strip, as shown in diagram 1
• measure the height, h
The student repeats this method for different values of L.
(i) Give the independent and dependent variables in the investigation.
(2)
independent variable

dependent variable

(ii) Give two control variables in the investigation.

(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(iii) Suggest how the student could accurately measure the height, h.
(2)

23
 *P75826A02332* Turn over
(c) The table shows the results of the investigation.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Length (L) in cm Height (h) in cm

20 2

40 8

60 18

100 53

120 71

(i) Diagram 2 shows the wooden strip when L = 80 cm.

wooden strip starting height

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

table clamp

load

Diagram 2

Using diagram 2, determine the height, h, in the laboratory.

[1 cm on the diagram = 10 cm in the laboratory]
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

height, h = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

24
*P75826A02432* 
(ii) Plot a graph of the student’s results.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) Draw the curve of best fit.

(1)

Height (h)
in cm
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Length (L) in cm

(iv) The student concludes that h is directly proportional to L.

Evaluate the student’s conclusion.
(2)

(Total for Question 10 = 15 marks)

25
 *P75826A02532* Turn over
11 The photograph shows a power bank used to recharge the battery in an
electronic device.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) The power bank stores charge.
The charge stored can be measured in amp-hours (Ah). 1 Ah is the amount of
charge transferred by a current of 1 A in a time of 1 hour.
Calculate the charge stored in coulombs when the charge stored is 1 Ah.
Use the formula
charge stored = current × time taken
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

charge stored = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C

26
*P75826A02632* 
(b) An electronic device is connected to the power bank.
Whilst recharging, the electronic device receives a constant current of 2.4 A and
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

3.8 × 103 C of charge is transferred.

(i) Calculate the time taken to recharge the electronic device.
Give your answer in minutes.
(3)

time = ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . minutes

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) The electronic device is connected to the power bank using a long cable.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Suggest how using a long cable affects the time taken to recharge the
electronic device when compared with a short cable.
(2)

27
 *P75826A02732* Turn over
(c) A student owns three electronic devices. Each electronic device stores a different
amount of charge.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
The table gives some information about the charge stored by the electronic
devices and how often they need to be recharged.

Charge stored Frequency of

Electronic device
in Ah recharging

A 2.4 once every day

B 4.2 once during the week

C 6.8 once during the week

The power bank stores a maximum charge of 26.8 Ah.

The student needs to take these three electronic devices on a school trip for
one week.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Determine whether the maximum charge of the power bank is enough to
recharge the batteries of the three electronic devices during the school trip.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 11 = 11 marks)

28
*P75826A02832* 
12 A car accelerates with a constant driving force along a horizontal road and reaches its
maximum speed.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
This is the velocity-time graph for the car’s journey.

Velocity
in m/s 40

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0
0 20 40 60 80 100

Time in s

(a) By drawing a tangent to the curve, determine the acceleration of the car at a time
of 20 s.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

acceleration = ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

30
*P75826A03032* 
(b) Determine the distance travelled by the car during the first 80 s of its journey.
(5)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
(c) Explain the motion of the car after 80 s.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 12 = 12 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 110 MARKS

31
 *P75826A03132*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Wednesday 22 May 2024
Morning (Time: 2 hours) Paper
reference 4PH1/1PR 4SD0/1PR

Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, protractor, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 110.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P73428A
©2024 Pearson Education Ltd.
F:1/1/1/1/1/1/
*P73428A0136*
2 The photograph shows an electric heater connected to the mains electricity supply.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The circuit the heater is connected to is fitted with a circuit breaker, which breaks the
circuit if the current gets too high.
(a) Give an advantage of using a circuit breaker instead of using a fuse.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6
*P73428A0636* 
(b) The voltage of the mains electricity supply is 230 V.
(i) State the formula linking power, current and voltage.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

(ii) The normal operating current of the heater is 11 A.

Calculate the input power to the heater for this current.
Give your answer in kW.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

power = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW
(c) The circuit breaker has a rating of 16 A.
Suggest a reason why the heater may switch off before it reaches its normal
operating current.
(1)

(Total for Question 2 = 6 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

7
 *P73428A0736* Turn over
3 In 1947, the Railton Mobil Special was the first ground vehicle to achieve a speed of
more than 400 miles per hour.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) During a test, the vehicle travelled at a speed of 403 miles per hour.
(i) Calculate a speed of 403 miles per hour in metres per second (m / s).
[1 mile = 1600 m]
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

speed = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s
(ii) During the test, the vehicle travelled past two markers.
The markers were placed a known distance apart.
Describe how these markers could be used to determine the speed of

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
the vehicle.
(3)

8
*P73428A0836* 
(b) The diagram shows the vehicle travelling at a constant speed.

direction of travel
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

driving force

One of the horizontal forces acting on the vehicle has been drawn.
Complete the diagram by drawing a labelled arrow for the other horizontal force
acting on the vehicle.
(3)
(Total for Question 3 = 8 marks)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

9
 *P73428A0936* Turn over
5 A student needs to determine the density of some small rocks that appear to all be
made of the same material.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) The student decides to measure the mass and the volume of each rock.
Describe a method the student could use to accurately determine the mass and
the volume of each rock.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(5)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

12
*P73428A01236* 
(b) The table shows the student’s results for three of the rocks.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Rock Mass in g Volume in cm3

A 15 6.3

B 13 6.1

C 16 7.5

(i) State the formula linking density, mass and volume.

(1)

(ii) After looking at the data, the student concludes that one of the rocks may be
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

made of a different material from the others.

Using the data from the table, justify the student’s conclusion.
(4)

(Total for Question 5 = 10 marks)

13
 *P73428A01336* Turn over
7 A student investigates the voltage-current characteristics of an unknown
component, X.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) The student is given this equipment to investigate component X.
• battery
• variable resistor
• ammeter
• voltmeter
• connecting wires
The diagram shows an incomplete circuit containing the battery and
component X.
Complete the diagram by drawing a circuit the student could use for
their investigation.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

16
*P73428A01636* 
(b) The graph shows the results of the investigation.

4
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Current
2
in mA

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Voltage in V

(i) Draw a line of best fit on the graph.

(1)
(ii) Calculate the resistance of component X when the voltage is 4.2 V.
Give the unit.
(5)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

resistance = .............................................................. unit ........................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17
 *P73428A01736* Turn over
(iii) Which of these is equivalent to 4.2 V?
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
A 4.2 coulombs per second (C / s)

B 4.2 seconds per joule (s / J)

C 4.2 joules per second (J / s)

D 4.2 joules per coulomb (J / C)

(iv) The student concludes that component X is a filament lamp.

Comment on the student’s conclusion.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 7 = 13 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

18
*P73428A01836* 
9 A student stretches a rubber band.
(a) The photographs show a rubber band before and after it has been stretched.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
before after
(i) State which energy store increases in the rubber band after it has
been stretched.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) State the main method of energy transfer when the rubber band is stretched.
(1)

(iii) State the source of the energy transferred to the rubber band.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

24
*P73428A02436* 
(b) The diagram shows a force-extension graph for a rubber band.

Force
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

unloading

0
0
Extension
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) State how the graph shows that the rubber band does not obey Hooke’s law.
(1)

(ii) Explain how the graph shows that the rubber band is elastic.
(2)

25
 *P73428A02536* Turn over
(c) The student stretches the rubber band and then releases it. The band moves
vertically upwards.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(i) The band travels with an initial speed of 13 m / s.
When the band reaches its maximum height above the student’s hand, the
band has a speed of 0 m / s.
Calculate the maximum height that the band reaches.
Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
[ acceleration due to gravity = −10 m / s2 ]
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

maximum height = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

26
*P73428A02636* 
(ii) The band reaches its maximum height.
Explain the motion of the band as it falls from its maximum height to
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

the ground.
Refer to forces in your answer.
You may assume
• the band does not rotate
• the band does not reach terminal velocity
(5)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 9 = 15 marks)

27
 *P73428A02736* Turn over
10 Diagram 1 shows a generator inside a small wind turbine. The generator is connected
to a lamp and the windmill blades.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
windmill coil rotates
blades in direction
of arrow

N
S

slip rings

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

brushes
lamp

Diagram 1

(a) When the coil rotates in the direction of the arrow, the ammeter displays a
small current.
Explain how the generator produces a current.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

28
*P73428A02836* 
(b) The generator in the wind turbine acts as an alternating current (a.c.)
power supply.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 2 shows an electric circuit containing the generator being used to

charge a mobile phone battery.

generator

mobile phone
battery

Diagram 2
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Direct current (d.c.) is needed to charge the battery.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Explain why there is a diode in the circuit.

(2)

(ii) Explain how the current in the battery will change if the wind speed increases.
(2)

29
 *P73428A02936* Turn over
(c) The mean voltage across the battery is 7.2 V.
The battery gains 14 kJ of energy in 8400 seconds.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Calculate the mean current in the battery.
(3)

mean current = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 10 = 9 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

30
*P73428A03036* 
11 This question is about gas pressure.
(a) Diagram 1 shows some of the molecules of a gas in a sealed container.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Diagram 1

The molecules collide with all the surfaces of the container. This exerts an
outward force on the container and causes pressure.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Describe how the motion of the gas molecules causes an equal pressure on all the
walls of the container.
You may add to diagram 1 to help your answer.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

32
*P73428A03236* 
(b) The width of the container is slowly decreased so that the volume of the
container is smaller than before.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 2 shows the width of the container before and after this change. All
other dimensions of the container remain the same.

before after

8.4 cm 5.0 cm
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 2

The initial volume of the gas is 130 cm3.

The initial pressure of the gas is 100 kPa.
Calculate the pressure of the gas after the width of the container is decreased.
Assume the temperature of the gas remains constant.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

pressure = .................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

(Total for Question 11 = 6 marks)

33
 *P73428A03336* Turn over
12 Air is trapped in a boiling tube by sealing the boiling tube with a rubber bung.
The boiling tube is placed in a beaker containing hot water.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
bung

beaker

boiling tube
containing air

hot water

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) Energy is transferred from the thermal store of the water to the thermal store of
the air in the boiling tube with an efficiency of 16%.
The air in the boiling tube gains 1800 J of energy during this process. This is
defined as the useful energy transfer.
Calculate the amount of energy wasted during this process.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy wasted = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

34
*P73428A03436* 
(b) Give two ways that the apparatus could be modified to improve the efficiency of
the energy transfer.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 12 = 6 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 110 MARKS

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

35
 *P73428A03536*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 14 June 2024
Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
•• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
•• Answer all questions.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
•• The total mark for this paper is 70.
The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
•• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
Write your answers neatly and in good English.
•• Try to answer every question.
Check your answers if you have time at the end.

Turn over

You may find the following formulae useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P75828A0224*
*P73429A0228* 


2 A wrench is used to turn a nut.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
nut
28 N

wrench

15 cm

Diagram 1
(Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/image-photo/adjustable-spanner-isolated-on-white-
chrome-1794553030)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) The force applied to the wrench is 28 N.
Calculate the moment applied by the wrench on the nut.
Give a suitable unit.
(3)

moment = .............................................................. unit = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) State two changes that could be made to increase the size of the moment
applied to the nut.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P75828A0624* 
(c) Diagram 2 shows the wrench as it is turned through 90°

28 N
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15 cm

28 N
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 2
(Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/image-photo/adjustable-spanner-isolated-on-white-
chrome-1794553030)

(i) The force is applied over a distance that is equal to a quarter of the
circumference of a circle.
The circle has a radius of 15 cm.
Calculate the distance over which the force is applied.
[circumference of circle = 2 × ×radius]
(2)

distance = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the work done by the force as the wrench is turned through a
quarter of the circumference of the circle.
(3)

work done = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 2 = 10 marks)

7
 *P75828A0724* Turn over
3 A student investigates how much infrared radiation is absorbed by different surfaces.
(a) The photograph shows some of the equipment available to the student.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
infrared heater

black bottle

silver bottle

thermometers

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

8
*P75828A0824* 
The student pours some water into each bottle.
Describe a method the student could use to investigate how the colour of the
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

bottle affects the amount of infrared radiation absorbed by the bottle.

You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(6)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

9
 *P75828A0924* Turn over
(b) The student plots a graph to show how the temperature of the water in each
bottle varies with time.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Draw two curves to show the expected variation in temperature of the black
bottle and the silver bottle during the investigation.
Label your curves with the colour of each bottle.
(2)

Temperature

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Time

(Total for Question 3 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10
*P75828A01024* 
4 This question is about electrostatics.

(a) A polythene rod is rubbed with a cloth, which causes both the rod and the cloth

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
to become charged.

(i) Which of these is the force that causes the rod and the cloth to
become charged?
(1)
A friction

B gravitational

C magnetic

D tension

(ii) The polythene rod becomes negatively charged.

Which of these statements explains how the rod has become
negatively charged?
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A the rod gains electrons

B the rod loses electrons

C the rod gains protons

D the rod loses protons

(b) A student has rods made from different materials.

The student rubs each rod the same way with a cloth.
The student measures the charge gained by each rod three times.
The table shows the results.

Charge in nanocoulombs (nC)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Material
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

1 2 3 Mean

glass +35 +38 +36 +36

ebonite –168 –170 –171 –170

polythene –61 –80 –59

acetate –20 –20 –18 –19

12
*P75828A01224* 
(i) One of the readings for the polythene rod is anomalous.
Circle the anomalous result in the results table.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)
(ii) State how the student should deal with the anomalous result.
(1)

(iii) Calculate the mean charge for the polythene rod.

(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

mean charge = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nC

(iv) Describe how the student could use the rods to demonstrate that there are
two different types of electric charge.
(3)

(Total for Question 4 = 9 marks)

13
 *P75828A01324* Turn over
7 A hydroelectric power (HEP) station generates electricity from renewable
energy resources.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) State what is meant by the term renewable energy resource.
(1)

(b) The diagram shows the design of a HEP station.

upper lake

tunnel transformer
pylon
direction of

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

water flow turbine lower lake

generator

Water flows from the upper lake to the lower lake through the turbine.
The turbine is connected to a generator, which generates electricity.
Describe the energy transfers involved in generating electricity in the HEP station.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

20
*P75828A02024* 
(c) The HEP station is located near a large wind farm.
(i) Give one advantage of generating electricity using the HEP station rather than
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

the wind farm.

(1)

(ii) Give one disadvantage of generating electricity using the HEP station rather
than the wind farm.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) The HEP station has an electric pump that can pump water from the lower
lake back to the upper lake.
The pump can be powered using electricity generated by the wind farm.
Explain how the HEP station and wind farm can be used together to maximise
the effectiveness of generating electricity.
(3)

(Total for Question 7 = 10 marks)

21
 *P75828A02124* Turn over
8 The photograph shows a water bath that a technician uses to heat some water.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) The water bath is filled with water at an initial temperature of 15 C.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the initial temperature of the water in kelvin.
(1)

initial temperature = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P75828A02224* 
(b) The technician heats the water to a final temperature of 60 C.
(i) Describe how the energy of the water molecules changes as the temperature
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

of the water increases.

(2)

(ii) The table shows some information about the heating element in the water
bath and the heating process.

Initial temperature of water 15 C

Final temperature of water 60 C

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Voltage of heating element 230 V

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Current in heating element 1.5 A

Time taken to heat water 45 minutes

Calculate the energy transferred by the heating element in the water bath
during the heating process.
(3)

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(iii) Calculate the mass of water being heated.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Assume that all the energy is transferred to the thermal store of the water.
[for water, specific heat capacity = 4200 J / kg C]
(3)

mass of water = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg

QUESTION CONTINUES ON THE NEXT PAGE

23
 *P75828A02324* Turn over
(c) Some water evaporates as a gas from the water bath.
(i) Describe the arrangement of particles in a gas.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

(ii) Describe two differences between evaporation and boiling.

(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 8 = 13 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

24
*P75828A02424* 
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 14 June 2024
Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P73430A
©2024 Pearson Education Ltd.
F:1/1/1/1/1/1/
*P73430A0124*
3 A sample of liquid gallium is allowed to cool in a laboratory.
The liquid gallium freezes to become a solid.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) Complete the diagram by drawing the arrangement of particles in a liquid and
the arrangement of particles in a solid.
The first particle in each box has been drawn for you.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Liquid Solid

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

8
*P73430A0824* 
(b) The initial temperature of the sample of liquid gallium is 80 °C.
The freezing temperature of gallium is 30 °C.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The final temperature of the solid gallium is 20 °C.

Complete the graph to show how the temperature of the gallium changes during
the time that it cools to 20 °C.
Add appropriate values to the temperature axis.
(3)

Temperature
in °C
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Time

(Total for Question 3 = 7 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

9
 *P73430A0924* Turn over
5 The diagram shows the collision between two balls, A and B.
The masses and velocities of both balls are shown before and after the collision.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Ball B is stationary before the collision.

v
4.9 m/s 3.5 m/s

A B A B
0.018 kg 0.018 kg
0.265 kg 0.265 kg

Before collision After collision

(a) When the balls collide, ball B applies a force on ball A, which causes the velocity

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

of ball A to change.
Ball A also applies a force on ball B during the collision.
Describe how the force applied on ball A compares with the force applied on
ball B during the collision.
(2)

(b) Calculate the momentum of ball A before the collision.

(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

momentum of ball A before collision = ............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

12
*P73430A01224* 
(c) Show that the velocity, v, of ball B after the collision is about 0.6 m / s.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(d) A collision is considered elastic if the total kinetic energy before the collision is
equal to the total kinetic energy after the collision.
Using data from the diagram, deduce whether this collision is elastic.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(4)

(Total for Question 5 = 12 marks)

13
 *P73430A01324* Turn over
6 This question is about generating electricity from renewable energy resources.
(a) Photograph 1 shows a solar farm in the United Kingdom and photograph 2 shows
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

a geothermal power station in Iceland.

Photograph 1 Photograph 2
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of generating electricity using solar

power and geothermal resources.
(4)

15
 *P73430A01524* Turn over
(b) A student investigates how the amount of light affects the output voltage of a
solar cell.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Photograph 3 shows how the student sets up their equipment.

lamp
solar cell

ruler

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

voltmeter

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Photograph 3

(i) The student varies the distance between the solar cell and the lamp and
measures the output voltage of the solar cell at each distance.
The student’s results are shown below.

5 cm, 0.45 V 14 cm, 0.06 V

8 cm, 0.18 V 17 cm, 0.04 V

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11 cm, 0.10 V 20 cm, 0.03 V

16
*P73430A01624* 
Draw a table showing the student’s results.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Give a control variable for the student’s investigation.

(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) The student states that the solar cell could be used as a power source for
the lamp.
They suggest that this would work if
• the solar cell is connected directly to the lamp
• the light from the lamp is used to produce the output power from the
solar cell
Explain, with reference to the principle of conservation of energy, why the
student’s suggestion would not work.
(2)

(Total for Question 6 = 10 marks)

17
 *P73430A01724* Turn over
8 The diagram shows a machine that can be used to measure the speed of
fast-moving protons.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
proton

detector

negative
plate
force
proton

path of

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

proton
magnetic
field

(a) At the start, the proton is attracted towards a negatively charged plate.
(i) Give a reason why the proton is attracted to the negatively charged plate.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

20
*P73430A02024* 
(ii) The proton accelerates at 1.90 × 1011 m / s2 from rest to a speed of
1.38 × 105 m / s.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Show that the time taken for this acceleration is about 7 × 10–7 s.
(3)

(b) The proton passes through a hole in the negatively charged plate and enters an
area where there is a magnetic field.
The magnetic field exerts a force on the proton, as shown in the diagram.
This force causes the proton to follow a circular path without changing speed.
(i) Give the direction of the magnetic field.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

(ii) Suggest how increasing the strength of the magnetic field will affect the
proton when it is moving in the magnetic field.
(2)

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

21
 *P73430A02124* Turn over
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Thursday 14 November 2024
Paper
Morning (Time: 2 hours)
reference 4PH1/1P 4SD0/1P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
Science (Double Award) 4SD0
PAPER: 1P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, protractor, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
•• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
If pencil is used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
•• Answer all questions.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
•• The total mark for this paper is 110.
The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

P75952A
©2024 Pearson Education Ltd.
V:1/1/1/1/1/1/1/
*P75952A0132*
2 An athlete jumps vertically from the ground.
(a) The athlete has a mass of 85 kg, and leaves the ground with an upwards velocity

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
of 4.5 m/s.
(i) State the formula linking kinetic energy, mass and speed.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the athlete’s kinetic energy at a speed of 4.5 m/s.

(2)

kinetic energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(iii) At the maximum height of the jump, the athlete has a speed of 0 m/s.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

State the increase in the amount of energy in the athlete’s gravitational
potential energy store from the ground to the maximum height of the jump.
(1)

increase in gravitational potential energy = ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(iv) State the formula linking gravitational potential energy, mass, gravitational
field strength and height.
(1)

(v) Calculate the maximum height of the athlete’s jump.

(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

height = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

6
*P75952A0632* 
(b) (i) Sketch a velocity-time graph for the athlete’s jump from the ground to the
maximum height of the jump. No numbers are required.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Assume there is no air resistance.

(3)

Velocity

0
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0 Time
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) What feature of the velocity-time graph gives the acceleration due to gravity?
(1)
A area under the line

B gradient

C x-axis
D y-axis

(iii) Explain why the gravitational field strength on the Moon is different from the
gravitational field strength on the Earth.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 14 marks)

7
 *P75952A0732* Turn over
3 (a) Photograph 1 shows a power supply for some electrical equipment. The electrical
equipment is connected to the mains supply.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Photograph 1

Explain why the power supply is completely covered in plastic.

(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The electrical equipment is connected to the mains power supply of 230 V.
(i) State the formula linking power, current and voltage.
(1)

(ii) The electrical equipment has a power of 350 W.

Calculate the current in the equipment when it is being used.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

current = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

8
*P75952A0832* 
(c) Photograph 2 shows a circuit breaker.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Photograph 2
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Explain the advantages of using a circuit breaker rather than a fuse.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 7 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

9
 *P75952A0932* Turn over
7 The diagram shows a submarine at rest underwater.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) There are two vertical forces acting on the submarine.
(i) One of the forces is called upthrust.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Give the name of the other force.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Draw two arrows on the diagram to represent the vertical forces acting on
the submarine.
(2)

(b) (i) State the formula linking pressure, density, gravitational field strength
and height.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the pressure from the water at a point 38 m below the surface of
the water.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

[density of sea water = 1030 kg/m3 ]

(2)

pressure = .................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

18
*P75952A01832* 
(c) To rise back to the surface, air is pumped into a storage tank inside the submarine.
(i) Explain how the air exerts pressure on the walls of the storage tank.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The air in the storage tank starts at a pressure of 410 kPa.
As the submarine rises, the air in the storage tank increases in temperature
from 2.5 °C to 18 °C. The volume of the storage tank remains constant.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the pressure of the air in the storage tank at 18 °C.

(4)

pressure = .................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 7 = 13 marks)

19
 *P75952A01932* Turn over
9 A student investigates different electrical components.

(a) The student first investigates how the voltage of a diode affects the current in
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

the diode.
They use this equipment.
• diode
• cell
• variable resistor
• wires
• voltmeter
• ammeter
Draw a circuit diagram to represent a circuit the student could use.
The diode has been drawn for you.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

23
 *P75952A02332* Turn over
(b) In the second investigation, the student uses a circuit with two different resistors,
A and B, and a battery with a voltage of 2.9 V.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Diagram 1 shows the circuit, and the current in each resistor.

2.9 V

A
0.15 A

0.23 A

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 1

(i) Calculate the current in the battery.

(1)

current = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

(ii) State the formula linking voltage, current and resistance.

(1)

(iii) Calculate the resistance of resistor A.

(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

resistance = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ω

24
*P75952A02432* 
(iv) Diagram 2 shows the same three components connected in a different circuit.

2.9 V
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A B

Diagram 2

Resistor B has a resistance of 13 ohms.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Comment on the difference between the current in the battery in Diagram 2

and the current in the battery in Diagram 1.
Use calculations to support your answer.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 9 = 12 marks)

25
 *P75952A02532* Turn over
10 A student investigates energy transfer by conduction in different metals.
The student uses wax to attach one coin to each of four different metal rods, and

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
connects the rods to a heater.
When the heater is on, energy is transferred through the metal rods. This melts the
wax and causes the coins to fall.
The diagram shows the student’s equipment viewed from above.

coin attached with wax

iron

heater
steel aluminium

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

copper

(a) This is the student’s method.

Step 1 switch on the heater and start a stopwatch
Step 2 record the time taken for the coin to fall from each metal rod

(i) Give the independent variable in this investigation.

(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Give the dependent variable in this investigation.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26
*P75952A02632* 
(iii) A teacher tells the student that their investigation is not valid (a fair test).
Give two ways to improve the validity of the student’s investigation.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iv) The student improves the validity of their investigation.

Describe what the student should do to improve the reliability of their results.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

27
 *P75952A02732* Turn over
(b) The table gives the student’s results.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Material Time for coin to drop in seconds

iron 180

steel 230

aluminium 140

copper 90

(i) Plot a bar chart of the results on the grid.

(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) State why a bar chart is a better choice than a line graph for this investigation.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 10 = 10 marks)

28
*P75952A02832* 
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Wednesday 20 November 2024
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
•• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
If pencil is used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
•• Answer all questions.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
•• The total mark for this paper is 70.
The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

cloth

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
rod

When the rod is rubbed with the cloth, the cloth becomes positively charged and the
rod becomes negatively charged.
(a) Explain how the cloth has become positively charged.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) The negatively charged rod makes contact with a metal object connected to
the ground.
There is an ammeter in series with the object and the ground.
(i) Explain why the ammeter shows a current for a short time and then shows
no current.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

4
*P75953A0420* 
(ii) State the formula linking charge transferred, current and time.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) The mean current displayed on the ammeter is 6.8 × 10–6 A.

The current lasts for 3.7 ms.
Calculate the charge transferred.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

charge = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C
(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

5
 *P75953A0520* Turn over
3 (a) State the principle of conservation of momentum.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) The diagram shows object A and object B moving in opposite directions.
The arrows show the direction of the velocities of the two objects.

Object A
Object B

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6
*P75953A0620* 
Before the collision object A has a momentum of 39 kg m/s.
After the collision object A and object B stick together and stop moving.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) State the magnitude of the momentum of object B before the collision.
(1)

momentum = ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m/s

(ii) State the formula linking momentum, mass and velocity.
(1)

(iii) The mass of object A is 8.1 kg.

Calculate the velocity of object A before the collision.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

velocity = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(iv) The time taken for the collision is 0.56 s.
Calculate the average force on object A.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
(v) Give the direction and magnitude of the force on object B from object A.
(2)

magnitude = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Total for Question 3 = 9 marks)

7
 *P75953A0720* Turn over
5 Diagram 1 shows the apparatus a student uses to determine the specific heat
capacity of a liquid.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

power supply
A

lid
insulating material

liquid

electrical heater thermometer

Diagram 1
(a) Describe a suitable method the student could use to determine the specific heat
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

capacity of the liquid.

(5)

11
 *P75953A01120* Turn over
(b) The graph shows the student’s results.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
70
P Q
Temperature
in !C
60

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

30
0 5 10 15 20 25 30

Time in minutes

(i) What is happening to the liquid between points P and Q on the graph?
(1)

A melting

B freezing

C boiling

D condensing

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Use the graph to determine the change in temperature of the liquid after
15 minutes of heating.
(1)

temperature difference = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

12
*P75953A01220* 
(iii) The power of the heater is 48 W and the mass of the liquid is 0.53 kg.
Calculate the specific heat capacity of the liquid.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

specific heat capacity = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J / kg °C

(Total for Question 5 = 10 marks)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
 *P75953A01320* Turn over
6 The diagram shows forces used to turn a tap.

8.1 N

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
2.6 cm

2.6 cm
pivot

8.1 N

(a) (i) State the formula linking moment, force and perpendicular distance from
a pivot.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the total moment of the two forces required to turn the tap around
the pivot.
Give your answer in N cm.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

total moment = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N cm

14
*P75953A01420* 
(b) The tap is used to put some water in a bucket.
Describe the arrangement and motion of the water particles in liquid water.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You may draw a diagram to help your answer.

(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 6 = 7 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15
 *P75953A01520* Turn over
7 The photograph shows a wind turbine used for supplying energy on a large scale.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) (i) Describe a change in the turbine’s energy stores from when the turbine is at
rest to when it is moving at full speed.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Describe a change in the turbine’s energy stores when the wind is blowing
but the turbine moves at constant speed.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

16
*P75953A01620* 
(b) (i) State the formula linking efficiency to useful energy output and total
energy output.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) The wind transfers 1.2 × 106 J of energy to the turbine.

The total mass of the turbine blades is 16 000 kg.
The wind causes the turbine blades to accelerate from rest to an average
speed of 7.6 m/s.
Calculate the efficiency of the turbine.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

efficiency = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Total for Question 7 = 9 marks)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

17
 *P75953A01720* Turn over

Electricity - Short Notes (Prashant Kirad)
89% (36)
Electricity - Short Notes (Prashant Kirad)
9 pages
2024 Paper 1 (Questions) Physics Edexcel
33% (3)
2024 Paper 1 (Questions) Physics Edexcel
40 pages
Science-8-Dll-Q1w1-Daily-Lesson-Log-For-Week-3-Quarter-1 Edited
No ratings yet
Science-8-Dll-Q1w1-Daily-Lesson-Log-For-Week-3-Quarter-1 Edited
8 pages
12th Physics Unit 1 and 2 Question Paper English Medium PDF Download
No ratings yet
12th Physics Unit 1 and 2 Question Paper English Medium PDF Download
2 pages
Assignment - Moving Charges and Magnetism 1719308523974
No ratings yet
Assignment - Moving Charges and Magnetism 1719308523974
6 pages
IGCSE Edexcel All Equations Physics Tutor
100% (1)
IGCSE Edexcel All Equations Physics Tutor
1 page
Revision Guide Series O Level Physics PDF
100% (1)
Revision Guide Series O Level Physics PDF
21 pages
International GCSE Physics - Formula Booklet
No ratings yet
International GCSE Physics - Formula Booklet
4 pages
2022 June P-2 QP
No ratings yet
2022 June P-2 QP
18 pages
Physics 1P - Specimen Paper
50% (2)
Physics 1P - Specimen Paper
28 pages
Current Electricity
No ratings yet
Current Electricity
8 pages
4PH1 1PR Que 20190523 PDF
100% (1)
4PH1 1PR Que 20190523 PDF
36 pages
GPS 2 Answers
No ratings yet
GPS 2 Answers
4 pages
4PH1 2P Que 20190615
100% (2)
4PH1 2P Que 20190615
17 pages
4ph1 1p Que 20231117
No ratings yet
4ph1 1p Que 20231117
40 pages
2006 - Applied Physics Lab Manual
No ratings yet
2006 - Applied Physics Lab Manual
69 pages
(2022) App1 Practice Exam 3
No ratings yet
(2022) App1 Practice Exam 3
74 pages
Bouyancy Notes
No ratings yet
Bouyancy Notes
15 pages
4ph1 1pr Que 20230526
100% (1)
4ph1 1pr Que 20230526
36 pages
11 Newton - S Laws (62783)
No ratings yet
11 Newton - S Laws (62783)
12 pages
IGCSE TP Mass, Weight, Density and Pressure
No ratings yet
IGCSE TP Mass, Weight, Density and Pressure
36 pages
Thermo - CH - 02 - Second Law of Thermodynamics
No ratings yet
Thermo - CH - 02 - Second Law of Thermodynamics
37 pages
4ph1 2pr Que 20230617
No ratings yet
4ph1 2pr Que 20230617
28 pages
June 2011 QP - Paper 1P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
No ratings yet
June 2011 QP - Paper 1P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
32 pages
Physics Paper 2
No ratings yet
Physics Paper 2
28 pages
4ph1 2pr Que Jan 2022
No ratings yet
4ph1 2pr Que Jan 2022
24 pages
May20 Phy p1
No ratings yet
May20 Phy p1
32 pages
4sd0 1pr Que 20230526
No ratings yet
4sd0 1pr Que 20230526
36 pages
Basic Mechanical Engineering by AK Sir
No ratings yet
Basic Mechanical Engineering by AK Sir
75 pages
IGCSE B-3 Physics P2 Second Sem
No ratings yet
IGCSE B-3 Physics P2 Second Sem
28 pages
4ph1 1pr Que 20230526
No ratings yet
4ph1 1pr Que 20230526
36 pages
Anc Ment 638608908025340132
No ratings yet
Anc Ment 638608908025340132
208 pages
Teacher Guide - How Do Engineers Design Roller Coasters
No ratings yet
Teacher Guide - How Do Engineers Design Roller Coasters
15 pages
June 2019 (R) QP - Paper 1P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
No ratings yet
June 2019 (R) QP - Paper 1P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
36 pages
1P May 2020
No ratings yet
1P May 2020
32 pages
Contentdampdfinternational GCSEPhysics2017Exam Materials4ph1 2pr Que 20230617 PDF
No ratings yet
Contentdampdfinternational GCSEPhysics2017Exam Materials4ph1 2pr Que 20230617 PDF
28 pages
Thermal Science Manual
No ratings yet
Thermal Science Manual
64 pages
January 2022 (R) QP
No ratings yet
January 2022 (R) QP
24 pages
9702 s10 Ms 41
No ratings yet
9702 s10 Ms 41
5 pages
Excel Physics 2019 June P2R
No ratings yet
Excel Physics 2019 June P2R
22 pages
Conservation of Momentum1
No ratings yet
Conservation of Momentum1
8 pages
June 2022 QP
No ratings yet
June 2022 QP
24 pages
Heat Energy 2
No ratings yet
Heat Energy 2
8 pages
2019 Jun iGCSE Physics Paper 2 QP
No ratings yet
2019 Jun iGCSE Physics Paper 2 QP
20 pages
4PH0 2P Que 20180118
No ratings yet
4PH0 2P Que 20180118
20 pages
June 2018 QP - Paper 2P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
No ratings yet
June 2018 QP - Paper 2P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
20 pages
Past Paper
No ratings yet
Past Paper
40 pages
Physics 2019R P2 QP
No ratings yet
Physics 2019R P2 QP
28 pages
Aqa 8403 Equations Sheet
No ratings yet
Aqa 8403 Equations Sheet
4 pages
Aqa 8403 Es Jun13
No ratings yet
Aqa 8403 Es Jun13
4 pages
Edexcel Exam 6
No ratings yet
Edexcel Exam 6
36 pages
1PR May 2019 1 Unlocked
No ratings yet
1PR May 2019 1 Unlocked
36 pages
4PH1 2P Que 20190615
No ratings yet
4PH1 2P Que 20190615
20 pages
4ph1 1p Que 20231117 PDF
No ratings yet
4ph1 1p Que 20231117 PDF
37 pages
4PH0 2P Que 20170616
No ratings yet
4PH0 2P Que 20170616
20 pages
39 Cambridge IGCSE Physics Formulas R
No ratings yet
39 Cambridge IGCSE Physics Formulas R
10 pages
4PH1 2PR Que 20190615
0% (1)
4PH1 2PR Que 20190615
21 pages
Specimen 2017 QP
No ratings yet
Specimen 2017 QP
20 pages
PHY 124 Mini Quiz Show
No ratings yet
PHY 124 Mini Quiz Show
58 pages
4PH0 1P Que 20190111
No ratings yet
4PH0 1P Que 20190111
32 pages
January 2012 QP - Paper 2P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
No ratings yet
January 2012 QP - Paper 2P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
15 pages
Fluid Mechanics (2025)
No ratings yet
Fluid Mechanics (2025)
7 pages
4PH1 2P Que 20190615 PDF
No ratings yet
4PH1 2P Que 20190615 PDF
20 pages
w73621 Int Gcse Physics 4ph1 4sd0 Exam Aid
No ratings yet
w73621 Int Gcse Physics 4ph1 4sd0 Exam Aid
4 pages
Edexcel International GCSE Physics 2022 Paper P
No ratings yet
Edexcel International GCSE Physics 2022 Paper P
5 pages
9702 PHYSICS: MARK SCHEME For The October/November 2010 Question Paper For The Guidance of Teachers
No ratings yet
9702 PHYSICS: MARK SCHEME For The October/November 2010 Question Paper For The Guidance of Teachers
6 pages
Physics Edexcel
No ratings yet
Physics Edexcel
15 pages
Physics 2019 P2 QP
No ratings yet
Physics 2019 P2 QP
20 pages
Review On Thermo-Mechanical and Material Flow Analysis of Dissimilar Friction Stir Welding
No ratings yet
Review On Thermo-Mechanical and Material Flow Analysis of Dissimilar Friction Stir Welding
38 pages
Edexcel Physics IGCSE Equations
No ratings yet
Edexcel Physics IGCSE Equations
1 page
Edexcel Physics IGCSE Equations A4 Version
No ratings yet
Edexcel Physics IGCSE Equations A4 Version
1 page
Compaction and Compression of Powders-2
No ratings yet
Compaction and Compression of Powders-2
19 pages
P Sol Ch-07 Mechanical Properties of Solids
No ratings yet
P Sol Ch-07 Mechanical Properties of Solids
6 pages
Pirompugd 2009
No ratings yet
Pirompugd 2009
9 pages
June 2019 Question Paper 1P
No ratings yet
June 2019 Question Paper 1P
32 pages
1973 - Das - Reed - Eubank - PVT Surface and Thermodynamic Properties of N-Butane
No ratings yet
1973 - Das - Reed - Eubank - PVT Surface and Thermodynamic Properties of N-Butane
10 pages
Thermodynamics Fs (Edustudy Point)
No ratings yet
Thermodynamics Fs (Edustudy Point)
3 pages
Mechanical Properties of Solid and Fluid PHYSICS Assertion & Reason Questions
No ratings yet
Mechanical Properties of Solid and Fluid PHYSICS Assertion & Reason Questions
4 pages
Motion in Straight Line - Numerical Sheet - 1
No ratings yet
Motion in Straight Line - Numerical Sheet - 1
2 pages
Laws of Motion Assignment PHYSICS - XI, DT - 23-8-2023
No ratings yet
Laws of Motion Assignment PHYSICS - XI, DT - 23-8-2023
1 page
P 9 - 110
No ratings yet
P 9 - 110
1 page
Topics in Advanced Quantum Mechanics
From Everand
Topics in Advanced Quantum Mechanics
Barry R. Holstein
5/5 (1)
Problems in Quantum Mechanics: Third Edition
From Everand
Problems in Quantum Mechanics: Third Edition
D. ter Haar
3/5 (2)
Essentials of Radiation Heat Transfer
From Everand
Essentials of Radiation Heat Transfer
C. Balaji
No ratings yet
Understanding Vector Calculus: Practical Development and Solved Problems
From Everand
Understanding Vector Calculus: Practical Development and Solved Problems
Jerrold Franklin
No ratings yet
Theory of Approximation
From Everand
Theory of Approximation
N. I. Achieser
No ratings yet
Physics by Example
From Everand
Physics by Example
Tim Prichard
No ratings yet
Feynman Lectures Simplified 1B: Harmonic Oscillators, & Thermodynamics
From Everand
Feynman Lectures Simplified 1B: Harmonic Oscillators, & Thermodynamics
Robert Piccioni
No ratings yet
Physics on a Shoestring
From Everand
Physics on a Shoestring
Binanda C. Barkakaty
No ratings yet
Feynman Lectures Simplified 2B: Magnetism & Electrodynamics
From Everand
Feynman Lectures Simplified 2B: Magnetism & Electrodynamics
Robert Piccioni
No ratings yet